Sony Cinealta Pdw F330K Users Manual F330L/F330K/F350L

PDW-F330K to the manual 15a6a6fc-02ca-40ce-bcf4-f1e24b357d8e

2015-01-24

: Sony Sony-Cinealta-Pdw-F330K-Users-Manual-285920 sony-cinealta-pdw-f330k-users-manual-285920 sony pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 188 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

3-990-971-12(1)

Professional Disc

Camcorder

Operating Instructions

Before operating the unit, please read this manual

thoroughly and retain it for future reference.

PDW-F330L

PDW-F330K

PDW-F350L

Owner’s Record

The model and serial numbers are located on the top.

Record these numbers in the spaces provided below. Refer

to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer

regarding this product.

Model No. Serial No.

To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock,

do not expose this apparatus to rain or

moisture.

To avoid electrical shock, do not open the

cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified

personnel only.

This Professional Disc Camcorder is classified as a CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT.

Laser diode properties

Wavelength: 403 to 410 nm

Emission duration: Continuous

Laser output power: 65 mW (max. of pulse peak), 35 mW

(max. of CW)

Tekniska data för laserdiod

Våglängd: 403 till 410 nm

Emissionslängd: Kontinuerlig

Laseruteffekt: 65 mW (max. för pulstopp), 35 mW (max. för

kontinuerlig våg)

Spesifikasjoner laserdiode

Bølgelengde: 403 til 410 nm

Strålingens varighet: Kontinuerlig

Laserens effekt: 65 mW (maks stråletoppunkt), 35 mW

(maks ved kontinuerlig stråling)

Laserdiodin ominaisuudet

Aallon pituus: 403 - 410 nm

Välityksen kesto: Jatkuva

Laserlähdön teho: 65 mW (sykehuipun maks.), 35 mW

(jatkuvan aallon maks.)

CAUTION

The use of optical instruments with this product will increase

eye hazard.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures

other than those specified herein may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

VAROITUS!

LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ

KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA

ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1

YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.

VARNING

OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA

BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN

UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM

ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.

For the customers in the U.S.A.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference when the equipment is

operated in a commercial environment. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,

if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction

manual, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential

WARNING

This label is located inside

the outside panel of the unit.

Denna etikett finns på

apparatens ovansida.

Denne mærkat sidder på

apparatets øverste panel.

Tämä kyltti sijaitsee laitteen

yläpinnalla.

Dette merket er plassert på

oversiden av produktet.

area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the

user will be required to correct the interference at his own

expense.

You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not

expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to

operate this equipment.

All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be

shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device

pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

For the customers in the USA and Canada

RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES

For the State of California, USA only

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery contains perchlorate.

For the customers in Europe

This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC

Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the

European Community.

Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the

following European standards:

• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)

• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)

This product is intended for use in the following

Electromagnetic Environment(s):

E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3

(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV

studio).

For the customers in Taiwan only

Voor de Klanten in Nederland

Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.

You can help preserve our environment

by returning your used rechargeable

batteries to the collection and recycling

location nearest you.

For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable

batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or visit

http://www.rbrc.org/

Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium-ion

batteries.

• Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in als

klein chemisch afval (KCA).

• Dit apparaat bevat een vast ingebouwde

batterij die niet vervangen hoeft te worden

tijdens de levensduur van het apparaat.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier indien de batterij

toch vervangen moet worden.De batterij mag

alleen vervangen worden door vakbekwaam

servicepersoneel.

• Lever het apparaat aan het einde van de

levensduur in voor recycling, de batterij zal dan

op correcte wijze verwerkt worden.

4Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Foreword ..................................................... 7

Before Use ....................................................7

Model Distinction Marks Used in This Manual

.............................................................7

Chapter 1 Overview

Product Configurations ............................. 8

Features ...................................................... 9

Principal Differences Between the PDW-F330

and PDW-F350....................................9

Camera Features ...........................................9

Features of the Optical Disc Drive (VDR) .10

Input/Output Features .................................11

Other Features.............................................12

Location and Function of Parts ..............13

Front............................................................13

Right Side ...................................................15

Status Display on the LCD Monitor ...........17

Left Side and Upper Section.......................22

Rear.............................................................24

VCL-719BXS Auto Focus Lens (Supplied

With the PDW-F330K) .....................27

Viewfinder ..................................................29

Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen ...31

RM-F300 Infrared Remote Commander ....32

Chapter 2 Preparations

Attaching and Replacing the Lithium

Battery ................................................ 35

Preparing a Power Supply....................... 36

Using a Battery Pack ..................................36

Using an AC Adaptor .................................36

Setting the Area of Use and the Frame

Frequency ..........................................37

Using the Unit for the First Time ...............37

Setting the Frame Frequency......................37

Setting the Date and Time of the Internal

Clock...................................................39

Preparing the Lens................................... 40

Mounting the Lens..................................... 40

Adjusting the Flange Focal Length............ 40

Adjusting the Viewfinder ......................... 42

Detaching the Viewfinder.......................... 42

Adjusting the Viewfinder Position ............ 42

Adjusting the Eyepiece Focus and the Screen

(Brightness, Contrast, and Outline

Emphasis) ......................................... 43

Attaching a 5-inch Electronic Viewfinder. 43

Using the Shoulder Strap ........................ 44

Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position..... 44

Mounting on a Tripod .............................. 45

Using a Video Light.................................. 45

Preparing the Audio Input System ......... 46

Using the Supplied Microphone ................ 46

Using an External Microphone.................. 46

Attaching a UHF Synthesized Tuner......... 47

Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment.. 49

Connecting the Remote Control Unit ..... 49

Connecting ............................................... 51

Connecting an External Video Monitor..... 51

Using an i.LINK Connection..................... 51

Connecting Using the HDSDI Connector.. 53

Connections for Using the PDZ-1 ............. 53

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Handling Discs .........................................54

Discs Used for Recording and Playback ... 54

Notes on Handling ..................................... 54

Write-Protecting Discs............................... 54

Loading and Unloading a Disc .................. 55

Formatting a Disc ...................................... 55

Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not

End Normally (Salvage Function).... 56

Basic Procedure for Shooting ................ 57

Recording – Basic Operations................ 58

Selecting the Recording Format ................ 58

Adjusting the Black Balance/White Balance.

Setting the Electronic Shutter .................... 62

Adjusting the Iris ....................................... 64

Adjusting the Audio Level......................... 65

Setting the Time Data ................................ 66

Table of Contents 5

Setting for Special Shooting Cases.............69

Deleting Clips .............................................69

Recording Shot Marks ................................70

Setting the Thumbnail Image at Recording

Time ..................................................70

Recording – Advanced Operations ........71

Time-lapse Video Recording (“Interval

Recording” Function)........................71

Slow & Quick-motion Shooting .................73

Starting a Shoot With a Few Seconds of Pre-

Stored Picture Data (Picture Cache

Function) ...........................................74

Assigning User-Defined Clip Titles

Automatically....................................75

Assigning User-Defined Clip and Clip List

Names................................................77

Viewing Camera Video During Playback

(Live & Play Function) .....................79

Playback.................................................... 80

Normal Playback ........................................80

Checking the Last Two Seconds of the

Recording (a Recording Review

Operation)..........................................81

Checking the Recording on a Color Video

Monitor..............................................81

Thumbnail Search ....................................82

Searching Using Thumbnails......................82

To switch the information displayed in the

thumbnail screen ...............................83

Changing the Thumbnail Image (Index Frame)

of a Clip.............................................83

Cuing Up a Frame by Searching for an

Essence Mark ....................................84

Searching Using the Chapter Function.......85

Searching Using the Expand Function .......85

Clip List Playback.......................................86

Locking (Write-protecting) Clips ...............87

Deleting Clips .............................................88

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Overview ...................................................90

Creating Clip Lists....................................93

Including Sub Clips in the Current Clip List

...........................................................93

Adding Sub Clips Using the Expand Function

.......................................................... 95

Adding Sub Clips Using the Chapter Function

.......................................................... 96

Editing Clip Lists...................................... 97

Reordering Sub Clips................................. 97

Adjusting Sub Clip In/Out Points (Trimming)

.......................................................... 97

Deleting Sub Clips..................................... 98

Saving the Current Clip List to Disc.......... 98

Setting the Start Timecode for the Current Clip

List.................................................... 99

To Switch the Information Displayed on

Thumbnails....................................... 99

Managing Clip Lists ............................... 100

Loading a Clip List From the Disc as the

Current Clip List............................. 101

Deleting a Clip List From the Disc.......... 101

Sorting the List of Clip Lists ................... 101

Using the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software

.......................................................... 102

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and

Detailed Settings

Menu Organization and Operation ....... 103

TOP Menu ............................................... 110

Menu List................................................. 111

Displaying Menus.................................... 131

Basic Menu Operations............................ 131

Using the USER Menu (Example Menu

Operation)....................................... 132

Editing the USER Menu .......................... 133

Resetting USER Menu Settings to the

Standard Settings............................ 135

Setting the Status Display on the

Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

.......................................................... 136

Selecting the Display Items ..................... 136

Change Confirmation/Adjustment Progress

Messages ........................................ 137

Setting the Marker Display...................... 137

Setting the Viewfinder Screen Display.... 138

6Table of Contents

Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the

Color Bars .......................................138

Setting the Shot ID....................................139

Showing the Status Display......................140

Adjustments and Settings from Menus 140

Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Switch

Positions ..........................................140

Selecting the Output Signals.....................140

Setting the Color Temperature Manually .141

Specifying an Offset for the Auto White

Balance Setting................................141

Selecting Gamma Tables ..........................142

Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches

.........................................................142

Selecting the Lens File..............................143

Selecting the Aspect Ratio........................143

About the CCD Scan Mode ......................144

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the

User Setting Data

Saving and Loading User Files .............146

Handling the “Memory Stick”..................146

Saving USER Menu Data (User File) to the

“Memory Stick” ..............................147

Loading Saved Data From a “Memory Stick”

.........................................................149

Saving and Loading Scene Files ..........150

Saving a Scene File...................................150

Loading Scene Files..................................152

Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to the

Standard Settings.............................153

Chapter 7 File Operation

Overview .................................................155

Directory Structure ...................................155

File Operation Restrictions.......................156

File Access Mode File Operations ........158

Appendix

Important Notes on Operation ..............160

Phenomena Specific to CCD Image Sensors

........................................................ 161

Condensation ........................................... 161

Maintenance ........................................... 162

Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting . 162

Maintenance............................................. 164

Operation Warnings............................... 165

Troubleshooting ..................................... 169

Using UMID Data .................................... 171

MPEG-4 License ..................................... 173

About i.LINK .......................................... 173

About a “Memory Stick”........................ 174

Specifications......................................... 176

Chart of Optional Components and

Accessories ..................................... 180

Glossary.................................................. 181

Index........................................................ 184

Foreword

Before Use

After purchasing this unit, before operating, it is necessary

to set the region of use and the frame frequency.

(Unless these settings are made, the unit will not operate.)

For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of Use

and the Frame Frequency” on page 37.

Model Distinction Marks Used in

This Manual

Indications of functions specific to particular

models

This manual describes three models: PDW-F330L, PDW-

F330K, and PDW-F350L.

These models are divided into the PDW-F330L/F330K

and the PDW-F350L. The following model distinction

marks are used to indicate functions, switches, indications,

etc. that apply only to one or the other.

Specific functions, switches, indications, etc., for the

PDW-F330L/F330K

Specific functions, switches, indications, etc., for the

PDW-F350L

Frame frequency indications for interlaced

signals

In the menus of this unit, the frame frequency of an

interlaced signal is shown as “60I” or “50I”, with a capital

letter, but in this manual these are shown as “60i” and

“50i” with a lower-case letter.

For progressive signals, both menus and manual use a

capital letter (e.g. “30P”, “25P”, “23.98P”).

F330

F350

Chapter1

8Product Configurations

Chapter 1 Overview

Overview

Product Configurations

The PDW-F330/F350 Professional Disc Camcorder series

includes the models PDW-F330L, PDW-F330K, and

PDW-F350L, with different product configurations. The

components and accessories supplied of these models are

as shown in the following figure.

a) Use a tripod adaptor with a suffix of “-E” or later on the model name.

For more details, see “Mounting on a Tripod” (page 45).

ZOOM

PUSH SET

SHOTMARK

THUMBNAIL

PLAY/PAUSE

STOP

PDW-F350L

PDW-F330L

PDW-F330K

SUB CLIP

PUSH AFREC PAUSE

REC

FFWDFREV

PREV NEXT

DXF-801/801CE Viewfinder

PDW-F330 Camcorder

Shoulder strap

PDW-F350 Camcorder

Test chart for flange focal

length adjustment

Stereo Microphone VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor a)

DXF-20W Viewfinder

VCL-719BXS

Auto Focus Lens

RM-F300 Infrared

Remote Commander

•Lens mount cap

•PFD23 Professional Disc

•PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software

•Operating Instructions

(Japanese version, English

version, and CD-ROM manual)

•Warranty Booklet

Features

Chapter 1 Overview

Features

The PDW-F330/F350 is an XDCAM 1) HD 2) camcorder

integrating an HD video camera using three HD CCDs of

the 1/2-inch type with a total effective pixel count of 1.56

million, and a Professional Disc 1) drive.

This unit provides a range of useful shooting functions for

video production, and allows shooting and recording in

both progressive scan and interlace scan modes with an

HD image having 1080 effective scan lines. Since it also

supports SD 3) DVCAM recording, it can be used through

a transition from SD to HD production.

The use of Professional Disc adds high reliability to

recording and playback, and the unit also includes many

playback and editing functions exploiting the possibilities

of random access.

1) XDCAM and “Professional Disc” are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

2) HD: High Definition

3) SD: Standard Definition

Principal Differences Between the

PDW-F330 and PDW-F350

The specifications of the PDW-F330 and PDW-F350

differ in part, as follows.

a) A DXF-20W 2-inch CRT viewfinder (option) with aspect ratio 16:9 can

be installed in the camcorder.

Camera Features

1/2-inch HD CCD

The use of three interline transfer CCD with an effective

pixel count of approximately 1.56 million (1440 ×1080)

enables high sensitivity, high picture quality, and high

fineness video shooting.

Camera signal processing for high quality

video

A specially-developed ASIC (application specific

integrated circuit) for signal processing provides the

following functions.

• A 12-bit A/D converter ensures recording of pictures

stable at high quality.

• Both progressive and interlace scan modes are

supported.

• You can select from five HD shooting/recording modes:

23.98P 1), 25P, 29.97P 2), 50i, and 59.94i 3), for ideal

support of various applications including digital cinema

production, program production, and event video

production.

• For recording and playback in the DVCAM format (SD),

the aspect ratio (16:9/4:3) and standard broadcasting

system (NTSC/PAL) can be freely selected. Further,

when NTSC is selected, video shot at 23.98P can also be

subjected to 2-3 pulldown and recorded. (The recording

format is then 59.94i.)

1) In this system, shown as 23.9P or 23.98P.

2) In this system, shown as 30P.

3) In this system, shown as 60I.

Shooting functions provide various effects

This unit is equipped with many of the functions provided

in a film camera, allowing the operator creative control

through a variety of techniques.

Slow shutter function

A maximum of 64 frames can be accumulated using the

slow shutter function. In low light levels this allows clear

and noiseless video to be shot, and provides a fantasy

video effect with ghost images.

Time lapse function (interval recording) 1)

Using this function slow-moving subjects can be shot with

the movement compressed in time. This is convenient for

many applications, such as monitoring plant growth, or the

progress of a construction site.

1) This function is available when the recording mode is MPEG HD.

Slow & quick-motion functions 1)

The PDW-F350 has slow & quick-motion functions.

These allow the shooting frame rate to be different from

the playback frame rate, allowing the same functions as

overcranking or undercranking with a film camera. Unlike

low-speed or high-speed playback of normally shot video,

this provides a smooth slow-motion effect, or action

speeded up beyond what is actually possible.

1) This function is available when the recording mode is MPEG HD.

Item PDW-F330 PDW-F350

Viewfinder 1.5-inch CRT,

4:3 aspect ratio

(supplied as

standard) a)

2-inch CRT, aspect

ratio 16:9

(supplied as

standard)

Video output

connectors BNC ×3 (analog

component

outputs, HD/SD

switchable)

BNC (HDSDI

output)

Audio output

connectors RCA ×2 XLR, 5-pin

(balanced output)

Timecode input/

output connectors BNC (input/output

switchable) BNC ×2

(one for input, the

other for output)

Slow & quick-

motion functions No Yes

F350

10 Features

Chapter 1 Overview

Shooting functions to cope with different

shooting conditions

• The ATW 1) and auto iris functions allow shooting with

automated adjustment of the white balance and intenstity

levels to cope with varying ambient lighting conditions.

• By switching among the four levels (including CLEAR)

of neutral density (ND) filter, it is possible to

compensate for lighting conditions, and control the

depth of field.

• When shooting in daylight or other high color

temperature illumination, pressing the 5600K button

instantly switches the color temperature setting to

5600K 2).

• With the GAIN switch, you can adjust the gain of the

video amplifier according to the lighting conditions

when shooting. You can vary the setting in the GAIN

switch positions (H/M/L) to any values in the range –3

dB to +48 dB.

1) Auto Tracing White balance

2) Only when the WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST position

Saving and recalling settings on a

“Memory Stick”

Using a “Memory Stick” 1) (supplied separately), you can

save menu settings adjusted to particular shooting

conditions, and then recall those settings as required.

1) “Memory Stick” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Features of the Optical Disc Drive

(VDR)

Support for HD/SD recording and playback

formats

For HD video recording format, MPEG-2 MP@HL

compression is used, and the image quality (bit rate) and

recording time 1) can be selected according to the shooting

application. Recording in the DVCAM format is also

supported. The audio is recorded as four channels or two

channels 2), uncompressed.

1) The recording mode can be selected from the three modes: HQ (High

Quality), SP (Standard Play) and LP (Long Play).

2) DVCAM recording is available for four channels only.

Proxy AV data recording

The Proxy AV data is low resolution data using MPEG-4

(video 1.5 Mbps, audio 64 kbps per channel). With this

unit, when recording HD or SD high resolution data, low

resolution Proxy AV data is automatically generated at the

same time, and recorded.

Since the Proxy AV data is compact, it can be transferred

to a computer or network at high speed, enormously

reducing the storage capacity required for recording.

Exploiting this allows a laptop computer to be used for

editing 1), allows content management on an inexpensive

and compact server, and makes many other applications

easy to implement.

1) Using the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software, a simple EDL (edit

decision list) can be created.

Saving general-purpose files

The Professional Disc has an area of approximately 500

MB provided for storing general-purpose computer files.

Recording and playback in clip units

A clip is created each time recording is started and

stopped.

• Recording always writes to an empty area of the disc.

Therefore, even if playback is carried out between

shooting sessions, there is no danger of the next shooting

inadvertently overwriting previous material. During

playback, the next they are recorded can always be

started immediately.

• Since unwanted clips can be deleted on this unit

immediately after they are recorded, the disc capacity

can be used effectively.

Convenient playback and search functions

exploiting the disc characteristics

Thumbnail search

Pressing the THUMBNAIL button on this unit displays a

representative image for each clip as a thumbnail on the

LCD (liquid crystal display) monitor, in the viewfinder,

and on the external video monitor.

Selecting a thumbnail with the cursor and pressing the

PLAY/PAUSE button allows any clip to be checked

easily.

Essence mark search

During or after movie recording, an essence mark can be

recorded on any scene. A list of frames with an essence

mark recorded can be displayed on the LCD monitor, in

the viewfinder, and on the external video monitor. Essence

marks can also be added after recording using the supplied

PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software.

Expand function

The length of any clip selected in the thumbnail list can be

divided into 12, and the first frames of these 12 divisions

can also displayed in the form of a thumbnail list. With this

function, it is easy to search rapidly for scenes within a

particular clip. This function is called the expand function,

and it can be applied to the same clip up to three times to

display 1728 thumbnails in a list.

Features

Chapter 1 Overview

Scene selection

You can select clips on the disc to create a clip list. The

clips in this list can be played back in any order. A single

disc can hold up to 99 clip lists.

Audio recording functions

Audio is recorded as uncompressed data with 16-bit

quantization, and a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.

Depending on shooting requirements and recording time,

either two or four audio channels can be selected. (Only

four channels for DVCAM recording.)

• The unit is equipped with a stereo front microphone.

• There are two AUDIO IN connectors (XLR, 3-pin) on

the rear of the unit, which can be used for line and

microphone input.

• The CA-WR855 Camera Adaptor (supplied separately)

can be used to install the WRR-855 series slot-in type

UHF synthesized tuner (supplied separately) without

using any connecting cable.

• The audio signals to be recorded on the disc can be freely

selected from the audio inputs to the stereo microphone,

AUDIO IN connectors and the UHF synthesized tuner,

and assigned to any desired audio channel.

Input/Output Features

Equipped with an i.LINK connector

The i.LINK connector on this unit supports the following

two functions.

DV stream output (AV/C 1) mode connection): A DV

stream can be output from the i.LINK connector on

this unit, and recorded on a DV recorder or nonlinear

editor supporting DV. For recording and playback in

MPEG HD format, a down-converted DV stream can

be output.

File access from a computer (FAM 2) connection): An

FAM connection between this unit and a computer

allows the video, audio, and metadata information on

the disc to be read and written as files. (The data can

be written and read as normal files on a computer.)

With this function, a nonlinear editing device

connected to this unit can be used for direct HD video

editing or simple Proxy A/V data editing, enabling a

more efficient workflow.

1) Audio/Video Control

2) File Access Mode

Other signal input/output connectors

HDSDI output connector

The audio signals are embedded in the video signal. The

HD video and audio output from this connector can be

recorded on an external HD device.

HD/SD analog component output connector

During HD video recording and playback, either an HD

signal or down-converted SD signal can be output. (The

output signal selection is carried out in a menu.)

Composite video output connector

The 50i/25P video is output as the PAL signal, the 60i/30P

video is output as the NTSC signal, and the 23.98P video

is output as the NTSC signal which has undergone 2-3

pull-down processing.

Timecode input/output connectors

Provided with a single input/output connector (controlled

by a switch).

Provided with one input connector and one output

connector.

GENLOCK connector

The SD or HD reference signal can be input to apply a

genlock to the camera.

Video light connector

There is an interface connector for a maximum 50 W video

light, and a control switch. Depending on the switch

setting, the light can be turned on and off as recording

starts and stops.

Remote control connector

Connect the RM-B150/B750 remote control unit (supplied

separately) or other remote commander, to allow remote

operation of the shooting functions of this unit.

Audio output connectors

Provided with RCA phono jacks, allowing stereo output.

Provided with XLR connectors (5-pin, balanced output),

allowing stereo output.

Earphone jack (monaural/stereo)

Audio channels to be monitored can be selected with the

MONITOR switch on the side of the unit. Switch between

monaural and stereo using the menus.

F350

F330

F350

F330

F350

12 Features

Chapter 1 Overview

Other Features

User-friendly interface functions

ASSIGN (assignable) switches

The unit is provided with four ASSIGN switches; two on

the front and the others on the top of the grip. You can

assign various functions to these switches. By assigning

frequently used functions to the switches, you can call up

the desired functions instantly, for example during

shooting operations. The functions that can be assigned are

as follows.

• Lens zoom control (telephoto/wide-angle)

• Easy focus function

• Turbo gain function

• Enabling and disabling the infrared remote commander

function

Infrared remote commander

You can use the supplied infrared remote commander to

carry out the following operations.

• Starting and stopping recording, auto focusing, zoom

control (telephoto/wide-angle)

• Recording essence marks (shot mark 1 and shot mark 2)

• Playback, high-speed playback / reverse high-speed

playback, jump to the next/previous clip

• Thumbnail display and selection, a clip list selection

To prevent misoperation, the remote commander function

is disabled when this unit is powered on. To use the

infrared remote commander, you must enable the remote

commander function using a menu. If you use the remote

commander frequently, it is recommended that you assign

the function of this menu to one of the ASSIGN switch.

3.5-inch color LCD monitor

The LCD monitor on the side of the unit can be switched

to show the following images and data.

• Status information, including audio level meters for four

channels and timecode

• List of thumbnails of the video recorded on the

Professional Disc

• A playback image of the video recorded on the

Professional Disc

• The camera image

• The image in the LCD monitor has about 4% cropped

from each of the four edges of the actually captured

video image. For accurate framing, always use the

viewfinder.

• When the area of use is set to “PAL AREA” (frame

frequency 50i or 25P), the image in the LCD monitor

may be reduced in quality, with jaggies on diagonal

lines, but this is not a malfunction.

Note

Notes

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

Location and Function of Parts

Front

aLens mount securing rubber

After locking the lens in position using the lens locking

lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections.

This fixes the lens mount, preventing it from coming loose.

bLens mount cap

Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever (see page

14). When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for

protection from dust.

c LENS connector (12-pin)

Connect the lens cable mainly for using a 2/3-inch type

lens. (This connector is not used for a 1/2-inch type lens,

which is connected by the hot shoe inside the lens mount.)

Consult your Sony dealer when you are using a lens other

than VCL-719BXS (supplied with the PDW-F330K).

When mounting or removing the lens on this unit, power

off this unit first.

dAUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance

adjustment) switch

Activates the automatic white/black balance adjustment

functions.

WHT: Adjusts the white balance automatically. If the

WHITE BAL switch (see page 16) is set to A or B, the

white balance setting is stored in the corresponding

memory. If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST,

the automatic white balance adjustment function does

not operate.

BLK: Adjusts the black set and black balance

automatically.

eREC (recording start) button

Press to start recording. Press it again to stop recording.

The effect is the same as that of the REC button on the

supplied lens. When the REC SWITCH function is

assigned to an ASSIGN switch on the ASSIGNABLE page

of the OPERATION menu, you can use the switch as the

REC button.

fAuto focus ranging sensor

When an VCL-719BXS (supplied with the PDW-F330K)

auto focus lens is mounted, this measures the distance to

the subject, and automatically focuses the lens.

This sensor is provided as an auxiliary function for

improving the automatic focusing speed. Even if this

sensor is blocked, the focusing precision will not be

affected.

gVF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin)

Connect the supplied viewfinder.

hLens mount (special bayonet mount)

Attach the lens.

iFILTER selector

Selects from the four neutral density (ND) filters built into

this unit.

5REC button

2Lens mount cap

4AUTO W/B BAL switch

8Lens mount

9FILTER selector

3LENS connector

7VF connector

0ZEBRA button

qa ASSIGN 1/2 switches

qs Lens locking lever

qd MENU knob

qf SHUTTER switch

qh AUDIO LEVEL knob

1Lens mount securing rubber

6Auto focus ranging

sensor

qg Remote commander receptor

Note

Position

number

ND filter

1 CLEAR

21/4 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/4)

31/16 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/16)

41/64 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/64)

14 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

Normally set this to 1 (CLEAR).

For shooting with the lens iris wide open for reduced depth

of field, or when the subject is too brightly lit and the auto

iris function does not operate correctly, select an

appropriate position.

When this selector is used with the menu item for filter

selection display set to ON (see page 137), the new setting

appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.

You can change a MAINTENANCE menu setting so that

different white balance settings can be stored for different

FILTER selector positions. This allows you to

automatically obtain optimum white balance for the

current shooting conditions in linkage with the filter

selection.

For details, see “To adjust the white balance” (page 60).

jZEBRA button

Press to display a zebra pattern (diagonal stripes) in the

viewfinder screen.

The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas

where the video level is approximately 70%. However, on

the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION menu, you

can change the setting so that areas where the video level

is 100% and above are also indicated at the same time. In

addition, you can also change the video level for

displaying the zebra pattern in the range from 30% to

107%.

For details, see “Setting the Viewfinder Screen Display”

on page 138.

kASSIGN 1/2 switches

You can assign the desired functions to each of the

ASSIGN 1 and ASSIGN 2 switches on the ASSIGNABLE

page of the OPERATION menu.

The following functions are factory preset to the switches.

For details, see “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN

Switches” on page 142.

lLens locking lever

After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens

mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position.

After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens mount

securing rubber to prevent the lens from becoming

detached.

mMENU knob

Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu.

For details about how to use the MENU knob, see “Basic

Menu Operations” on page 131.

nSHUTTER switch

Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Flick to SEL to

switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting within the

range previously set with the menu. When this switch is

operated, the new setting appears on the setting change/

adjustment progress message display area for about 3

seconds.

For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode

settings, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter” on page 62.

oRemote commander receptor

Press the ASSIGN switch which is assigned to enable/

disable the remote commander function, and then aim the

supplied infrared remote commander at this receptor.

To prevent misoperation, the remote commander function

is disabled when the camcorder is powered on. To use the

infrared remote commander, it is necessary to assign the

remote commander enabling/disabling function to an

ASSIGN switch, and then press the ASSIGN switch to

enable the remote commander. (This function is factory

preset to the ASSIGN 2 switch.)

For details of how to assign a particular function to an

ASSIGN switch, see page 142.

pAUDIO LEVEL knob

Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1and 2.

You can disable this knob by setting the AUDIO CH1

LEVEL and AUDIO CH2 LEVEL items on the AUDIO-1

page of the MAINTENANCE menu. (The knob is factory

preset so that it is enabled.)

Switch Function

ASSIGN 1 EZ MODE (EZ mode ON/OFF)

ASSIGN 2 IR REMOTE (infrared remote commander

enabled/disabled)

Note

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

Right Side

Near the front

a5600K button

Press to light the button and switch the standard color

temperature for shooting to 5600K. Use this button for

outdoor shooting in daytime or shooting under lighting

with higher temperature. This button is effective only

when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.

bLIGHT switch

Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT

connector (see page 23) is turned on and off.

AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light is in

the on position, the video light is turned on

automatically while the camcorder is recording.

MAN: You can turn the video light on or off manually,

using its own switch.

• When this switch is set to AUTO, at the beginning of the

recording, the picture is recorded even though the

lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on. If

the beginning of the recording is important, you should

set this switch to MAN. However, when using the

interval recording mode, the video light is automatically

turned on immediately before recording starts.

• To ensure proper operation of the video light, Sony

recommends the use of the BP-GL95 Battery Pack with

the camcorder.

cGAIN switch

Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the

lighting conditions during shooting. The gains

corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected

in the menu. (The factory settings are L = 0 dB, M = 9 dB,

and H = 18 dB.)

When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on

the setting change/adjustment progress message display

area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.

For details, see “Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Switch

Positions” on page 140.

dVDR SAVE/STBY (VDR save/standby) switch

Switches the status of the power supply to the VDR while

recording is paused (REC PAUSE).

SAVE: At the start of recording, an internal operating

sound may be recorded. There is a small delay from

pressing the REC button until recording starts, since

the power consumption is less than in the standby

state.

STBY: When the REC button is pressed, recording starts

immediately.

• Even if the switch is on the SAVE side, the unit exits

SAVE (power saving) mode and enters STBY (standby)

mode whenever you exit REC PAUSE mode by carrying

out playback to check the recorded video or by

displaying the thumbnail screen (page 82). To put the

unit into SAVE mode again, put the unit into REC

PAUSE mode again after recording, or power the unit

off and on again.

• An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start

of recording when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set

to SAVE.

ePOWER switch

Turns the main power supply on and off.

fMONITOR (monitor volume adjustment) knob

Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning

tone that is output via the built-in speaker or optional

earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum

setting, no sound can be heard.

qa OUTPUT/DCC switch

15600K button

3GAIN switch

6MONITOR knob

7ALARM knob

2LIGHT switch

5POWER switch

8LCD monitor

9MENU switch

0WHITE BAL switch

4VDR SAVE/STBY switch

Notes

16 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

gALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment) knob

Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via

the built-in speaker or optional earphones. When the knob

is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard.

hLCD monitor

Displays camera video, VDR-related warnings, remaining

battery capacity, remaining disc space, audio levels, time

data, and so on.

For details, see “Status Display on the LCD Monitor” on

page 17.

iMENU switch

When flicking toward ON, the menu is displayed. When

flicking toward STATUS, the status of the camcorder (of

current settings) is displayed.

For details, see “Displaying Menus” on page 131.

jWHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch

Controls adjustment of the white balance.

PRST: Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value

(the factory default setting: 3200K). Use this setting

when you have no time to adjust the white balance.

A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment settings

already stored in A or B.

Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 13) on

the WHT side, to automatically adjust the white

balance, and save the adjustment settings in memory

A or memory B. The 5600K button does not function.

You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when

ATW 1) is in use.

B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and WHITE

SWITCH is set to ATW on the WHITE

SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu, ATW

is activated. When this switch is adjusted, the new

setting appears on the setting change/adjustment

progress message display area of the viewfinder

screen for about 3 seconds. You can assign the ATW

function to an ASSIGN switch on the ASSIGNABLE

page of the OPERATION menu.

For details about how to assign the function to an ASSIGN

switch, see “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches” on

page 142.

1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white balance of the picture

being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions.

kOUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast

control) switch

Switches the video signal, which is output to the video disc

drive (referred to as “VDR”), viewfinder, and video

monitor from the camera section, between the following

two.

BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.

CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera. When

this is selected, you can switch DCC 1) on and off.

1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright background

with the iris opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will

be lost in the glare. The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and

restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following

cases.

• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day

• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window

• Any high contrast scene

LCD monitor operating buttons

aDISPLAY/EXPAND button

Each time pressing this button, the display in the LCD

monitor changes as follows.

ALARM

Minimum Maximum

OUTPUT

DCC

CAMBARS

ONOFF

OUTPUT: BARS, DCC: OFF

A color bar signal is output and the DCC circuit does not

operate. Use this setting to adjust the video monitor, to

record the color bar signal, etc.

OUTPUT: CAM, DCC: OFF

The video signal from the camera is output, and

the DCC circuit does not operate.

OUTPUT: CAM, DCC: ON

The video signal from the camera is output, and

the DCC circuit operates.

1DISPLAY/EXPAND button

2COUNTER/CHAPTER button

3RESET button

4BRIGHT button

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is

displayed, the duration of the selected clip is divided into

12, and the first frame of each of the divisions is shown in

a further thumbnail display (expand function). Each time

you press the button, the division is repeated (to a

maximum of three times, with 1728 divisions). Hold down

the SHIFT button and press this button to step back

through the division process.

For details of the expand function, see page 85.

bCOUNTER/CHAPTER (counter display toggle/

chapter) button

Each time this button is pressed, the counter display

section changes as follows. This setting is activated only

when the LCD monitor display is set to STATUS with the

DISPLAY/EXPAND button.

COUNTER: Displays the elapsed recording/playback

time.

TC: Displays timecode.

U-BIT: Displays user bits data.

If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is

displayed, those frames on which essence marks are

recorded appear in a list (chapter function). Press the

button once more to return to the normal thumbnail

display.

By displaying thumbnails with essence marks attached in

place of index frames, you can check the contents of clips

more easily and more quickly. This is also useful for

cueing up long clips.

For details of the chapter function, see page 85.

cRESET button

Resets the display of the time data when the LCD monitor

display is set to STATUS or CHAR with the DISPLAY/

EXPAND button. According to the settings of the

PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 22) and the

F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 22), this button

resets the display as follows.

a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the disc, those bits which

can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number,

shooting place, etc.

b) Can only be reset when the display is set to STATUS. When it is set to

CHAR, resetting is not possible.

For details, see “Setting the Time Data” on page 66.

If you press this button when thumbnails of frames with

essence marks are displayed using the COUNTER/

CHAPTER button, or when thumbnails of clip divisions

are displayed using the DISPLAY/EXPAND button, then

the display returns to the normal thumbnail display.

dBRIGHT (brightness) button

Sets the backlight brightness. Each time you press this

button, the backlight brightness cycles through the

following four levels:

H: Select this to view the LCD monitor in outdoor

daylight.

M: Brightness level between H and L.

L: Select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outside

at night.

OFF: Turn the backlight off (you can view video under

normal lighting). Select this in outdoor daylight when

the LCD monitor screen is subjected to direct

sunlight.

Status Display on the LCD Monitor

The following display appears when the LCD monitor

display is set to STATUS with the DISPLAY/EXPAND

button.

Display indication Meaning

Video with

superimposed

information

When the MENU switch is flicked

toward STATUS, the principal settings

of this unit appear as on the

viewfinder screen.

Video without

superimposed

information

The video only appears.

Status display Counter indications, warnings, audio

levels, and similar information

appears. No video image appears.

Settings of buttons and

switches

To reset

COUNTER/CHAPTER button:

COUNTER Counter to 0:00:00:00

COUNTER/CHAPTER button:

PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK

switch: PRESET

F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET

Timecode to 00:00:00:00

COUNTER/CHAPTER button:

U-BIT

PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK

switch: PRESET

F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET

User bits data a) to 00 00

00 00 b)

Settings of buttons and

switches

To reset

W A R N I N G : H U M I D

H D S P

T C G

01 : 23 : 45 15:

2 3 . 9 8 P 4 c h

P B N D F E X T - L K

H O L D

M I N S E C F R M

D I S C E B

B A T T E F Li

d B

O V E R

P E U K

18 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

aVideo format

Indicates the format of video being currently played back

or recorded.

HD HQ: HQ (high quality) mode in the MPEG HD video

format

HD SP: SP (standard play) mode in the MPEG HD video

format

HD LP: LP (long play) mode in the MPEG HD video

format

DVCAM: DVCAM format

bPlayback indicator

Appears during playback.

cCamera scan mode indicator

Indicates the camera scan mode of video being currently

played back or recorded.

• If NTSC AREA is selected 1)

60I: 59.94 fields per second, interlace scan mode

30P: 29.97 frames per second, progressive scan mode

23.98P: 23.98 frames per second, progressive scan mode

(converted to 60i at 2-3 pulldown)

• If PAL AREA is selected 1)

50I: 50 fields per second, interlace scan mode

25P: 25 frames per second, progressive scan mode

1) COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu (see

page 111).

There may be no indication displayed when this unit

cannot identify the camera scan mode, for example, when

playing back a disc recorded with other equipment.

dNon-drop-frame mode indicator

Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is selected.

eExternal synchronization indicator

Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to

an external signal input to the TC IN connector 1).

1) For the PDW-F350. For the PDW-F330, the TC connector (IN/OUT

switch set to IN).

fAudio channel display

Shows the audio channel mode during recording or

playback.

2ch: two-channel mode (only when the MPEG HD format

is selected)

4ch: four-channel mode

gHold indicator

Appears when the internal timecode generator is stopped.

hAudio level indicators

Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of

channels 1 to 4.

iLithium battery low voltage warning

Appears when the voltage of the internal lithium backup

battery (CR2032) is low. If this indication appears, replace

the lithium battery immediately (see page 36).

jRemaining battery capacity indicator

kRemaining disc capacity indicator

lWarning indicator area

Displays warnings when trouble with recording or

moisture condensation occurs.

For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 165.

Note

Indication Battery voltage

BP-L90A/L60S/

L80S

Other

batteries

BATT E [ ■■■■■■■ ] F 15.5 V or more 17.0 V or more

BATT E [ ■■■■■■ ] F 15.1 to 15.5 V 16.0 to 17.0 V

BATT E [ ■■■■■ ] F 14.6 to 15.1 V 15.0 to 16.0 V

BATT E [ ■■■■ ] F 13.8 to 14.6 V 14.0 to 15.0 V

BATT E [ ■■■ ] F 12.9 to 13.8 V 13.0 to 14.0 V

BATT E [ ■■ ] F 12.0 to 12.9 V 12.0 to 13.0 V

BATT E [ ■ ] F 10.8 to 12.0 V 11.0 to 12.0 V

BATT E [ ] F 10.8 V or less 11.0 V or less

Indication Battery voltage

BP-GL95/GL65/IL75/

M100, Anton Bauer

Battery System

BATT E [ ■■■■■■■ ] F 80 to 100%

BATT E [ ■■■■■■■ ] 70%

BATT E [ ■■■■■■ ] 60%

BATT E [ ■■■■■ ] 50%

BATT E [ ■■■■ ] 40%

BATT E [ ■■■ ] 30%

BATT E [ ■■ ] 20%

BATT E [ ■ ] 10%

BATT E [ ] 0%

Indication Remaining recording

time

DISC E [ ■■■■■■■ ] B 30 minutes

DISC E [ ■■■■■■ ] B 25 to 30 minutes

DISC E [ ■■■■■ ] B 20 to 25 minutes

DISC E [ ■■■■ ] B 15 to 20 minutes

DISC E [ ■■■ ] B 10 to 15 minutes

DISC E [ ■■ ] B 5 to 10 minutes

DISC E [ ■ ] B 2 to 5 minutes

DISC E [ ■ ] B (flashing) 0 to 2 minutes

DISC E [ ] B (flashing) 0 minutes

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

mTime counter display

Each press of the COUNTER/CHAPTER button cycles

through displays of timecode, user bits, and counter

information. You can display the date or time using the

four-way arrow key on the side control panel.

TCG: Value of timecode generator

TCR: Value of timecode reader

UBG: Value of user bits generator

UBR: Value of user bits reader

CNT: Counter information

CLK: Time by the internal clock

TCG and UBG can be displayed when the disc is stopped

and during recording, and TCR and UBR are displayed

during playback.

CLK appears when the COUNTER/CHAPTER button has

been pressed to display TC, and the PRESET/REGEN/

CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK.

Near the rear

aWARNING indicator

Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs in the

VDR section.

For details about the meaning of the states of the

WARNING indicator, see “Operation Warnings” on

page 165.

bACCESS indicator

This lights when data is written to or read from the disc.

cBuilt-in speaker

The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound during

recording, and playback sound during playback. The

speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings.

If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack, the

speaker output is suppressed automatically.

1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E mode, video and audio

signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal

electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.

For details about alarms, see “Operation Warnings” on

page 165.

dProtection cover of the side control panel

Open to access the side control panel (see page 20).

eEARPHONE jack

By plugging earphones, you can monitor the E-E sound

during recording and playback sound during playback.

When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound

through the earphones. Plugging earphones into the jack

automatically cuts off the sound from the built-in speaker.

You can select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO-2 page

of the MAINTENANCE menu.

F REC

PREC

PLAY/PAUSE

STOP NEXT

F FWD

x >

EJECT

1WARNING indicator

2ACCESS indicator

3Built-in speaker

4Protection cover of the side control panel

5EARPHONE jack

6EJECT button and indicator

7F REV button and indicator

8PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator

9F FWD button and indicator

0NEXT button

qa STOP button

qs PREV button

20 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

fEJECT button and indicator

Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc. The

indicator flashes while the disc is being ejected.

gF REV (fast reverse) button and indicator

This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction. The

indicator lights during high-speed playback in the reverse

direction.

hPLAY/PAUSE button and indicator

Press this button to view play back video images using the

viewfinder screen or a color video monitor. The indicator

lights during playback.

Press this button again during playback to pause,

outputting a still image. At this time the indicator flashes.

This unit is equipped with a color search function at

approximately four times normal playback speed, for easy

checking of recorded material. To use the color search

function at approximately four times normal playback

speed, press the F REV button or F FWD button during

playback.

At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F FWD

indicator light.

iF FWD (fast forward) button and indicator

This plays back at high speed in the forward direction. The

indicator lights during high-speed playback in the forward

direction.

jNEXT button

This jumps to the start of the next clip, then pauses. During

the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes. If you press this

together with the F FWD button, the jump is to the last

frame of the last recorded clip on the disc.

kSTOP button

Press this to stop disc playback.

lPREV (previous) button

This jumps to the start of the current clip, then pauses.

During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes. If you press

this together with the F REV button, the jump is to the start

of the first recorded clip on the disc.

Side control panel (inside the protection cover)

aMONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches

By means of combinations of the two switches, you can

select audio that you want to hear through the built-in

speaker or optional earphones.

CH-1

MIX

CH-2

CH-3

PRESET

AUTO

FRONT

WIRELESS

REAR

CH-1

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO IN

F-RUN

REGEN

OFF

SET

OFF

CLOCK

R-RUN

MONITOR

FRONT MIC

LOW CUT VIDEO OUT

CHARACTER

AUDIO LEVEL

THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP

MIX

CH-4

CH-1/2

CH-3/4

SHIFT

CLIP MENU

SEL/SET

0 10 0 10

ESSENCE

MARK

CH-2

CH-3

CH-4

LITHIUM BATT

1MONITOR switches

2SHIFT button

3Lithium battery compartment

4THUMBNAIL indicator

5THUMBNAIL button

6SUB CLIP indicator

9AUDIO SELECT switches

7SEL/SET button

(four-way arrow key)

8AUDIO LEVEL knobs

0AUDIO IN switches

qa VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch

qs F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch

qd FRONT MIC LOW CUT switch

qf PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch

Position of left-

side switch

Position of right-

side switch

Audio output

CH-1/CH-3 CH-1/2 Channel 1 audio

MIX Channels 1 and 2

mixed audio

(stereo) a)

CH-2/CH-4 Channel 2 audio

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE connector you can

hear the audio in stereo. (On the AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, HEADPHONE OUT must be set to “STEREO”.)

bSHIFT button

Use this in combination with other buttons.

cLithium battery compartment

Attach the supplied CR2032 lithium battery.

Details on how to attach the lithium battery, see

“Attaching and Replacing the Lithium Battery” on

page 35.

dTHUMBNAIL indicator

This lights when thumbnails are displayed.

eTHUMBNAIL button

Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search or create

a clip list.

When pressed, the whole-screen display changes to a

thumbnail display. Press once more to return to the whole-

screen display.

For a thumbnail search using essence marks, hold down

the SHIFT button and press this button.

fSUB CLIP indicator

This lights when using a clip list for playback.

gSEL/SET (select/set) button (four-way arrow key)

Sets the timecode and user bits. Push the button towards

left or right so that the digit you want to change flashes.

Pushing the button upward increases the value of the

flashing digit, and pushing it downward decreases the

value.

Hold down the SHIFT button and press upward (in the

direction of the “SUB CLIP” legend) to display the clip

lists (when no clip list is loaded into the current clip list).

When a clip list is loaded, that clip list can be played back.

Hold down the SHIFT button and press upward once more

to exit the display of the clip lists or to exit the clip list

playback state.

Hold down the SHIFT button and press downward (in the

direction of the “CLIP MENU” legend) to display the

CLIP menu. Hold down the SHIFT button and press

downward once more to exit the CLIP menu.

When thumbnails (index frames of clips) are displayed on

the LCD monitor, you can use this button to select a

thumbnail. Push the button in four directions to move the

cursor up, down, left and right. After selecting the desired

thumbnail with the cursor, press the button centrally to

confirm.

This button is used for scene selection and other

operations.

For details of clip list playback operations, see page 86.

For details of the CLIP menu, see “Managing Clip Lists”

(page 100).

For details of scene selection, see page 90.

hAUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel 1/2

recording level) knobs

If the audio is input via the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2

connectors, adjusts the audio levels of channels 1 and 2

when the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switches (see

below) are set to MANUAL.

iAUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel 1/2

adjustment method selection) switches

Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio

channels 1 and 2.

AUTO: Automatic adjustment

MANUAL: Manual adjustment

jAUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4) (audio

channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches

Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio

channels 1 and 2.

FRONT: Input signals from the microphone connected to

the MIC IN connector

WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the CA-WR855

Camera Adaptor (supplied separately) if a WRR-855

series UHF synthesized tuner (supplied separately) is

installed using the CA-WR855

REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device

connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors

AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches

Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio

channels 3 and 4.

F (FRONT): Input signals from a microphone connected

to the MIC IN connector

W (WIRELESS): Audio input signals from the CA-

WR855 camera adaptor (supplied separately) if a

WRR-855 series UHF synthesized tuner (supplied

separately) is installed using the CA-WR855

R (REAR): Audio input signals from an audio device

connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors

(The signal input to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector is

recorded on channel 3, and the signal input to the

AUDIO IN CH-2 connector on channel 4.)

CH-1/CH-3 CH-3/4 Channel 3 audio

MIX Channels 3 and 4

mixed audio

(stereo) a)

CH-2/CH-4 Channel 4 audio

Position of left-

side switch

Position of right-

side switch

Audio output

22 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

For audio channels 3 and 4, level adjustment can only be

performed in AUTO (automatic) mode. The audio level of

these channels cannot be adjusted in MANUAL (manual)

mode.

kVIDEO OUT (video output) CHARACTER switch

Selects whether or not (ON/OFF) to superimpose text

information on the VIDEO OUT connector 1) output.

1) For the PDW-F330, VIDEO OUT connector on the rear panel.

lF-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run)

switch

Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode

generator. The operating mode is set as explained below,

depending on the position of the switch.

F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of the

operating state of the VDR. Use this setting when

synchronizing the timecode with an external

timecode.

SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.

R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording. Use

this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the

disc.

For details, see “To set the timecode” on page 66 and “To

set the user bits” on page 67.

mFRONT MIC LOW CUT switch

Set to ON to insert a high-pass filter in the microphone

circuit, reducing wind noise. Normally leave the switch in

the OFF position.

nPRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch

Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize the

existing timecode.

PRESET: Records a new timecode.

REGEN: Records timecode continuous with the existing

timecode recorded on the disc. Regardless of the

setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the

camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.

CLOCK: Records timecode synchronized to the internal

clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-

RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.

Left Side and Upper Section

aASSIGN 3/4 switches

You can assign the desired functions to these switches on

the ASSIGNABLE page of the OPERATION menu.

For details, see “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN

Switches” on page 142.

bLarge viewfinder attachment shoe

Use this to mount an optional 5-inch electronic viewfinder

(see page 43).

cViewfinder front-to-back positioning knob

Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back position of the

viewfinder (see page 42).

dLid of the disc compartment

This opens when the EJECT button on the top panel is

pressed. Press the side of the lid to close.

Note

1ASSIGN 3/4 switches

2Large viewfinder attachment shoe

4Lid of the disc compartment

6Shoulder strap fitting

7Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring

8Viewfinder fitting shoe

qa MIC IN connector

9Fitting for optional microphone holder

0LIGHT connector

3Viewfinder front-to-back

positioning knob

5Accessory fitting shoe

qs Shoulder pad

1Video output and timecode connectors

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

eAccessory fitting shoe

Attach an optional accessory such as a video light (see

page 45).

fShoulder strap fitting

Attach the supplied shoulder strap (see page 44).

gViewfinder left-to-right positioning ring

Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position of the

viewfinder (see page 42).

hViewfinder fitting shoe

Attach the supplied viewfinder.

iFitting for optional microphone holder

Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see page 46).

jLIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female)

A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50

W, such as the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent can

be connected (see page 45).

kMIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector

(XLR type, 5-pin, female)

Connect the supplied stereo microphone to this connector.

The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.

lShoulder pad

Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the position in

the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the position for

maximum convenience when operating the unit on your

shoulder.

For details of the adjustment, see “Adjusting the Shoulder

Pad Position” on page 44.

1Video output and timecode connectors

aGENLOCK IN (genlock signal input) connector

(BNC type)

Input an SD or HD reference signal when applying a

genlock to the camera, or synchronizing timecode to an

external source. Use the GENLOCK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu to carry out phase adjustment of

the horizontal synchronization signal for genlock.

The subcarrier phase cannot be adjusted.

bVIDEO OUT (video output) Y/PB/PR connectors

(BNC type)

Output component video signals (Y/PB/PR) for a video

monitor.

Connect a video monitor with component video signal

input connectors to check the video being shot by the

camera. You can also monitor VDR playback video.

You can select HD Y/PB/PR or SD Y/PB/PR signal output

on the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu. For

details, see “Selecting the Output Signals” on page 140.

Note

F330

GENLOCK

VIDEO

OUT

GENLOCK

VIDEO

OUT

TC IN

1GENLOCK IN connector

3VIDEO OUT connector

4TC OUT connector

5TC IN connector

1GENLOCK IN connector

2VIDEO OUT Y/PB/PR connectors

PDW-F330

PDW-F350

24 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

Even when you are recording or playing back HD 23.98P

signals, 23.98PsF signals are not output from this

connector. The output is 59.94i signals after 2-3 pulldown.

cVIDEO OUT (video output) connector (BNC type)

Outputs a video signal for a video monitor. The output

signal is composite or HD Y. When the output signal is

composite, setting menus, timecode, or shot data can be

superimposed on the camera output video depending on

the menu settings, and you can view them on the monitor

screen. To lock the timecode of an external device to the

timecode of this unit, connect the genlock signal input

connector of the external device to this connector.

• The subcarrier phase cannot be adjusted.

• Even when you are recording or playing back HD

23.98P signals, 23.98PsF signals are not output from this

connector. The output is 59.94i signals after 2-3

pulldown.

You can select the composite or HD Y signal output on the

OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu. For details, see

“Selecting the Output Signals” on page 140.

dTC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC type)

To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode

of this unit, connect this connector to the external VTR’s

timecode input connector.

eTC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC type)

To apply an external lock to the timecode of this unit, input

the reference timecode.

For details of timecode, see “To set the timecode” on

page 66.

Rear

aTALLY (back tally) indicator (red)

Lights up during recording. It will not light if the TALLY

switch (see below) is set to OFF. This indicator also flashes

to indicate warnings (see page 19) in the same manner as

the REC/TALLY indicator in the viewfinder.

For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 165.

bTALLY switch

Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator (see above)

function.

cBattery attachment shoe

Attach a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery Pack.

Alternatively, you can attach an AC-DN2B/DN10 AC

Adaptor to operate the camcorder on AC power supply.

For details about how to attach the battery or AC adaptor,

see “Preparing a Power Supply” on page 36. For

information about attaching a synthesized tuner, see

“Attaching a UHF Synthesized Tuner” on page 47.

For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the

camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following

battery packs: BP-GL95, BP-GL65, BP-L60S, and BP-

L80S.

dWRR connector (7-pin)

Connect a CA-WR855 Camera Adaptor with attached

WRR-855 UHF Synthesized Tuner.

For details, see “Attaching a UHF Synthesized Tuner” on

page 47.

Note

F350

Notes

F350

Note

1TALLY indicator

2TALLY switch

3Battery attachment

shoe

4WRR connector

1Connector panel

!"##$%&'#$()*

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

1Connector panel

a“Memory Stick” slot

Insert a “Memory Stick”. The “Memory Stick” access

indicator lights up when the “Memory Stick” is being

accessed for reading or writing.

For details about how to insert a “Memory Stick”, see “To

insert a “Memory Stick”” on page 146.

For details about the types of “Memory Stick”, see “About

a “Memory Stick”” on page 174.

Do not remove a “Memory Stick” while the “Memory

Stick” access indicator is lit. Doing so may cause a loss of

data.

bDC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR type, 4-

pin, male)

To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply,

connect an AC-550 AC Adaptor with the DC output cable

supplied with the adaptor.

cAUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio input channel 1/2)

connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female) and input

selection switches

Connect other audio equipment or external microphone.

Set the input selection switches as shown below according

to the microphone or equipment.

LINE (left position): For connecting an external audio

signal source such as a stereo amplifier

MIC (center position): For connecting any microphone

other than 48 V microphone

MIC +48V ON (right position): For connecting a 48 V

microphone

Signals input to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector can be

recorded on audio channels 1 and 3. Similarly, signals

input to the AUDIO IN CH-2 connector can be recorded on

audio channels 2 and 4. 1)

1) When the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4) switches on the side

control panel are set to “REAR” or “R”.

If MIC +48V ON is selected for a microphone other than

48 V microphone, the microphone may be damaged.

d(i.LINK) DV OUT S400 connector (6-pin, IEEE

1394 compliant)

Connect to a device supporting the DV format or a

computer, using an i.LINK cable (DV cable).

• If video and audio signals are not output from the

external device connected to the (i.LINK) DV OUT

S400 connector, disconnect the i.LINK cable (DV cable)

and then reconnect it, making sure that it is firmly seated.

• When you connect the camcorder and other equipment,

such as a hard disk drive, with an i.LINK interface to a

computer with i.LINK connectors, turn off the power of

the computer, the other equipment, and the camcorder

before connecting them using the i.LINK cable (DV

cable). If a bus-powered type 1) hard disk drive or similar

equipment is connected while the computer is powered

on, electric current flows into the camcorder because of

the high voltage caused by the load shift of the computer

power, and this may cause a malfunction.

1”Memory Stick” slot

2DC IN connector

3AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors and

input selection switches

1“Memory Stick” slot

2DC IN connector

3AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors and

input selection switches

5REMOTE

connector

6DC OUT 12V

connector

7TC connector and IN/OUT

selector switch

8VIDEO OUT connector

9AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2

connectors

5REMOTE

connector

6DC OUT 12V

connector

0AUDIO OUT connector

qa HDSDI OUT connector

PDW-F330

PDW-F350

4DV OUT S400

connector

4DV OUT S400

connector

“Memory Stick”

access indicator “Memory Stick”

Note

Notes

26 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

1) Equipment that can be powered through i.LINK cable (DV cable)

eREMOTE connector (8-pin)

Connect an RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit, which

makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely.

Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control Unit

to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder

POWER switch.

fDC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector (4-pin,

female)

Supplies power for a WRR-861/862 UHF Synthesized

Tuner (optional) (maximum 0.2 A).

Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF

synthesized tuner.

gTC (timecode) connector (BNC type) and IN/OUT

selector switch

• IN/OUT selector switch: IN

To apply an external lock to the timecode, input the

reference timecode.

• IN/OUT selector switch: OUT

To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode

of this unit, connect this connector to the external VTR’s

timecode input connector.

hVIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)

Outputs a video signal for a video monitor. When the

output signal is composite, setting menus, timecode, or

shot data can be superimposed on the camera output video

depending on the menu settings, and you can view them on

the monitor screen. To lock the timecode of an external

device to the timecode of this unit, connect the genlock

signal input connector of the external device to this

connector.

The subcarrier phase cannot be adjusted.

iAUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 (audio output channel 1/

2) connectors (RCA phono jacks)

Output the audio singnals being recorded or played back.

Connect to a stereo amplifier or video monitor’s audio

input connectors.

jAUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-pin, male)

Output the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and

2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The audio signals are selected

by the MONITOR switch.

kHDSDI OUT connector (BNC type)

Outputs an HDSDI signal (supporting the embedded audio

function).

Connect a video monitor with an HDSDI signal input

connector to check the video being shot by the camera.

You can also monitor VDR playback video.

• Even when you are recording or playing back HD

23.98P signals, 23.98PsF signals are not output from this

connector. The output is 59.94i signals after 2-3

pulldown.

• When the video recorded in the DVCAM format is

played back, no signal is output.

Note

F330

Note

F330

F350

Notes

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

VCL-719BXS Auto Focus Lens (Supplied With the PDW-F330K)

aPUSH AF (auto focus) button

When the focus adjustment is in the manual mode, by

pressing this button you can use the auto focus for an

instantaneous adjustment to the subject.

When the button is pressed, the auto focus operates until

the image is in focus, then disengages.

Even when the FOCUS switch is set to A (auto), by

pressing this button, you can restart the auto focus.

bFOCUS switch

Select the method of focusing.

A (auto): The auto focus function is constantly active.

While the auto focus is operating, the auto focus

indicator lights green. Even with the switch in the A

position, you can manually adjust the focus by

operating the focus ring.

M (manual): The manual mode allows focusing

adjustment with the focus ring.

In manual mode, auto focus adjustment is also

possible, by pressing the PUSH AF button.

cMACRO switch

When this switch is in the ON position, the macro mode is

enabled, allowing focusing over the whole range (5 cm 1)

to !) including the macro range (from 5 cm 1) to 90 cm

from the front of the lens).

This operation is independent of whether the focus

adjustment mode is auto or manual.

In the macro range, the auto focusing speed is lower.

1) At the wide-angle setting

dAuto focus indicator

This lights green while the auto focus function is

operating.

During flange focal length adjustment, it flashes orange or

green.

If an error occurs, it lights red.

For details of flashing during flange focal length

adjustment, see “Adjusting the Flange Focal Length” on

page 40.

eIris ring

For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to the M

(manual) position, then turn this ring.

fZoom ring

For manual zoom adjustment, set the ZOOM switch to the

MANU. position, then turn this ring.

gFocus ring

Turn this ring to adjust the focus.

This ring can be turned endlessly in both directions. The

faster you turn, the faster the focusing mechanism

operates, to minimize the amount of turning required for

focusing.

hFlange focal length adjustment button

Press this to adjust the flange focal length (the distance

from the lens mounting flange plane to the focusing plane).

For details of flange focal length adjustment, see

“Adjusting the Flange Focal Length” on page 40.

1PUSH AF button

2FOCUS switch

3MACRO switch

4Auto focus indicator

5Iris ring

6Zoom ring

9Focus control connector

7Focus ring

8Flange focal length

adjustment button

0Zoom control connector

qa ZOOM switch

qs IG control

qd IRIS button

qf IRIS switch

qg Power zoom lever

qh RET button

qj REC button

28 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

iFocus control connector (6-pin)

Connecting an optional focus servo controller allows

remote control of focusing.

jZoom control connector (8-pin)

Connecting an optional zoom servo controller allows

remote control of zooming.

kZOOM switch

Select the method of zoom operation.

SERVO: Power zoom. Operate the zoom with the power

zoom lever.

MANU. (manual): Manual zoom. Operate the zoom with

the zoom ring.

lIG (iris gain) control

Remove the rubber cap, and turn the knob inside, to adjust

the gain for auto iris adjustment.

This is set to an appropriate value when the unit is shipped.

It does not normally require any adjustment.

mIRIS button

When the IRIS switch is in the M position for manual

adjustment, press this button for an instantaneous auto

adjustment.

The iris is automatically adjusted while the button is held

down.

nIRIS switch

Select the method of iris adjustment.

A (auto): Auto mode. The iris is adjusted automatically.

M (manual): Manual mode. Adjust the iris with the iris

ring.

oPower zoom lever

This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the SERVO

position. Press the W end for wide-angle and the T end for

telephoto.

Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action.

Notes on auto focus

• When an auto focus lens is mounted, in the auto focus

mode a frame appears in the center of the viewfinder

screen indicating the auto focus area. Place the subject

on which you want to focus within this frame.

• In the following cases, it may be difficult to focus on the

subject. If this does happen, use manual focusing.

- If the subject has no contrast

- If the subject is moving rapidly

- When shooting point light sources, under street

lighting or at night

- When there are very bright objects close to the subject

- When shooting through a glass window

• On the LENS page of the MAINTENANCE menu, by

changing the AF DETECT AREA setting from

“CENTER” to “FULL”, instead of focusing only on the

center portion of the screen, the whole screen image is

used for focusing. In this case, the auto focus area frame

does not appear.

• If there are a number of objects within the screen at close

and far range, the focus may not be on the intended

subject. In this case, with the subject on which you want

to focus in the center of the screen, press the PUSH AF

button.

• After focusing with the PUSH AF button, if you operate

the zoom or adjust the iris, the depth of field may

become shallower, losing crisp focus. In such cases,

press the PUSH AF button once more.

• If you focus at wide-angle then zoom to telephoto, the

subject may no longer be in focus.

• The auto focus function does not operate while using the

slow shutter mode (4F or higher).

Note on zoom speed

Depending on the shooting distance, the zoom speed may

fall as the lens approaches the telephoto end.

pRET (return video) button

Use this to check the video. If you press this while the

internal VDR is pausing recording, the last few seconds

recorded appear in the viewfinder (a recording review

operation).

For details, see “Checking the Last Two Seconds of the

Recording (a Recording Review Operation)” on page 81.

Pressing this button (single click) during recording records

a shot mark 1, and double-clicking records a shot mark 2.

For details, see “Recording Shot Marks” on page 70.

qREC (record) button

Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to start

recording, then press once more to stop.

Note

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

Viewfinder

HIGH LOW OFF

LIGHT

SHUTTER GAIN UP

BATTREC

TALLY

SHUTTER GAIN UP

BATTREC

TALLY

1Eyepiece focusing knob

3Stopper

4PEAKING control

CONTRAST

control

6LIGHT switch and light

7TALLY indicator

0GAIN UP indicator

8REC/TALLY indicators

9BATT indicator

qa SHUTTER indicator

qd Tally light

qf Eyepiece release catch

qg BRIGHT control

qh Viewfinder connector

qj TALLY switch

Eye cup

qk DISPLAY switch

Microphone fixing screw

Microphone holder

Stereo microphone

(packaged with

camcorder)

DXF-801/801CE (supplied with the PDW-F330)

DXF-20W (supplied with the PDW-F350)

1Eyepiece focusing ring

2Camera person tally light

3Stopper

Microphone holder

4PEAKING control

5CONTRAST control

7TALLY indicator

8REC/TALLY

indicators

9BATT indicator

0GAIN UP indicator

qa SHUTTER indicator

Eye cup

qs Lock ring

qd Tally light

qg BRIGHT control

qh Viewfinder

connector

qj TALLY switch

qk DISPLAY switch

Microphone fixing screw

Stereo microphone

(packaged with

camcorder)

30 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

aEyepiece focusing knob (DXF-801/801CE)

Eyepiece focusing ring (DXF-20W)

Adjusts the viewfinder focus to match your eyesight (see

page 42).

bCamera person tally light (DXF-20W)

Lights while the camcorder is recording. To start recording

with your eye off the viewfinder, open the slide window.

This indicator flashes when the remaining battery capacity

or remaining disc capacity is low.

cStopper

Lift up when detaching the viewfinder (see page 42).

dPEAKING control

Adjusts the outline intensity of the viewfinder image (see

page 42).

eCONTRAST control

Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder image (see page 42).

fLIGHT switch and light (DXF-801/801CE)

The light lights the lens and the switch controls the light as

follows.

HIGH: Brighter

LOW: Darker

OFF: Turns the light off.

gTALLY (tally) indicator (green)

Flashes when the camcorder is in Interval Rec mode.

Flashing quickens while you are shooting in Interval Rec

mode.

For details on Interval Rec mode, see “Time-lapse Video

Recording (“Interval Recording” Function)” on page 71.

hREC/TALLY (recording/tally) indicators (red)

Function as follows.

• Begin flashing when you press the REC button on the

camcorder or on the lens until recording starts, then stay

on continuously during recording.

• Indicate a fault (see page 165).

On the CAM CONFIG page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, you can select that the lower indicator also lights.

iBATT (battery) indicator (red)

Lights up when the remaining battery capacity is low.

jGAIN UP indicator (orange)

Lights up when the gain is 3 dB or more.

kSHUTTER indicator (red)

Lights up when the SHUTTER switch (page 14) is ON.

lLock ring (DXF-20W)

If you want to directly view the viewfinder screen, rotate

this ring counterclockwise to align the matching marks (in

orange) on the lock ring and the viewfinder cylinder part to

each other, and then remove the eyepiece.

mTally light

When the TALLY switch (see below) is in the ON

position, this operates in the same way as the REC/TALLY

indicators.

nEyepiece release catch (DXF-801/801CE)

To view the viewfinder screen directly, press to hinge up

the eyepiece.

oBRIGHT (brightness) control

Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder image (see page

42).

pViewfinder connector (20-pin)

Connect to the VF connector (see page 13).

qTALLY switch

Set to the HIGH (high-intensity) or LOW (low-intensity)

to use the tally light.

rDISPLAY switch

Set to ON when you want to display text information on

the viewfinder screen.

F350

F330

F350

F330

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

Status Display on the Viewfinder

Screen

The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture

but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder

settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone

marker, etc.

When the menu screen is not displayed and the DISPLAY

switch is set to ON, the items for which an ON setting was

made on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page of the

OPERATION menu or with related switches are displayed

at the top and bottom of the screen.

The messages that give details of the settings and

adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear

for about 3 seconds while settings are being changed,

during adjustment, and after adjustment.

For details about the display item selection, see “Selecting

the Display Items” on page 136.

For details about setting change and adjustment progress

messages, see “Change Confirmation/Adjustment

Progress Messages” on page 137.

For details about marker display, see “Setting the Marker

Display” on page 137.

Layout of the status display on the

viewfinder screen

All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen

are shown below.

aVDR operation indicators

VDR operation is displayed as follows:

REC: During recording

PLAY: During playback

X: During pause of recording/playback

M: During high-speed playback or forward jump to clips

m: During reverse high-speed playback or reverse jump

to clips

bRecording format

Indicates the current recording format.

cFrame frequency

Indicates the current frame frequency.

When using the slow & quick-motion function, the

playback frame frequency appears with the shooting frame

frequency in square brackets (two-digit whole number,

with decimal fractions rounded).

During normal playback, the square brackets and included

value do not appear.

dTimecode

Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time, timecode,

user bits or other information selected by the DISPLAY

switch (see page 30).

eZoom position

Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range

from 0 to 99.

fFocus

Indicates the focusing distance corresponding to the focus

ring when an auto focus lens is mounted, and the focus

adjustment mode is set to manual.

The displayed resolution is as shown below.

• 10 m or less (including the macro area): 0.1 m

• 10 m to 100 m: 1 m

• 100 m to 200 m: 10 m

• 200 m to infinite distance: 50 m

gDC IN/battery voltage/remaining battery capacity

Indicates the battery voltage or the remaining capacity of

an attached internal battery pack, an AC adaptor, or an

external battery (a battery connected to the DC IN

connector).

When the power is supplied from an external battery, “DC

IN” appears here.

When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “INT” on

the VF DISP 1 page of the OPERATION menu, the battery

voltage is not indicated.

However, when the Anton Bauer intelligent battery system

or the BP-GL95/GL65 Battery Pack is used, the remaining

battery capacity is automatically detected and indicated in

steps of 10%.

• Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40%,

the indications MAX, 90%, 80%...40% are displayed for

three seconds in the viewfinder each time the remaining

battery capacity reduces by 10%.

• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40%,

the indication is displayed all the time.

• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10%,

the indication flashes. When the remaining battery

capacity is reduced further, the “LOW” flashes.

hClip list name

Displays the name (E0001 to E0099) of the currently

selected clip list.

1 A F-

H D S P P [ ] Z 1 m V

2823 .9

18 dB 1/ 20 00 30 F1 .6

.599 13 .4

REC TCG 0:30:11:03

W H I T E : N G

LEVEL TOO HIGH

E 0 0 9 9

LOW LIGHT

56 00

F350

32 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

i5600 indicator

Appears when the electric color temperature filter function

is on.

jFilter

Indicates the currently selected filter type.

kWhite balance memory

Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic

adjustment memory.

A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.

B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.

P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST

or when the preset button on an RM-B150 has been

pushed.

T: Displayed when ATW is being used.

lGain value

Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video amplifier, as

set by the GAIN switch.

mShutter speed

Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode. However,

if the SHUTTER switch (see page 14) is set to OFF,

nothing is displayed.

For details of the displayed shutter speed, see “Setting the

Electronic Shutter” on page 62.

nOperation/alarm message display area

For details, see “Operation/alarm messages” on

page 166.

oAudio level

Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2. The

peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as

follows to the audio level when an 1 kHz sine wave is

input.

pRemaining disc capacity

Indicates the remaining recording time (in minutes) of the

disc.

Examples of remaining recording time indication

qIris setting/auto iris override

Indicates the F value (iris setting) of the lens.

Also, the auto iris override is displayed using two squares

which appear in the upper and lower parts respectively.

For details, see “Adjusting the Iris” on page 64.

rSetting change and adjustment progress message

display area

For details, see “Change Confirmation/Adjustment

Progress Messages” on page 137.

RM-F300 Infrared Remote Commander

To use the infrared remote commander, it is necessary to

assign the remote commander enabling/disabling function

to an ASSIGN switch, and then press the ASSIGN switch

to enable the remote commander. (This function is factory

preset to the ASSIGN 2 switch.)

For details of how to assign a particular function to an

ASSIGN switch , see page 142.

Indication Remaining recording time

90 < More than 90 minutes

90 - 85 90 to 85 minutes

85 - 80 85 to 80 minutes

20 - 15 20 to 15 minutes

15 - 10 15 to 10 minutes

10 - 5 10 to 5 minutes

5 - 0 5 to 0 minutes

No display 0 minute

udio channel 1 level indicator

udio channel 2 level indicator

VDR level meter indicator

Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

aZOOM T/W (telephoto/wide-angle) buttons

Use these when a zoom lens is mounted.

Press W to zoom in the wide-angle direction, and T to

zoom in the telephoto direction.

bSHOT MARK 1/2 buttons

Press these during recording or playback to record a shot

mark 1 or shot mark 2.

These are only effective when SHOT MARK 1/2 is set to

ON on the ESSENCE MARK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

cSUB CLIP button

Press this to carry out a scene selection setting.

dTHUMBNAIL button

Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search or create

a clip list.

When pressed, the whole-screen display changes to a

thumbnail display. Press once more to return to the whole-

screen display.

ePREV (previous) button

This jumps to the start of the current clip, then pauses.

fF REV (fast reverse) button

This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction.

gPLAY/PAUSE button

Press this button to view playback video.

Press this button again during playback to pause.

hREC (record) button

Hold down the unmarked button, and press the z button to

start recording.

iREC PAUSE (recording pause) button

Hold down the unmarked button, and press the X button to

pause recording.

jPUSH SET button (four-way arrow key)

When thumbnails (index frames of each clip) are displayed

on the LCD monitor, you can use this button to select a

thumbnail.

Press the button in four directions to move the cursor up,

down, left and right. After selecting the desired thumbnail

with the cursor, press the button centrally to confirm.

kNEXT button

This jumps to the start of the next clip, then pauses.

lSTOP button

Press this to stop disc playback.

mF FWD (fast forward) button

This plays back at high speed in the forward direction.

nPUSH AF (auto focus) button

Use this when an auto focus lens is mounted.

When the button is pressed, the auto focus operates until

the image is in focus, then disengages.

Using the infrared remote commander

Before use

Pull out the insulation sheet.

Replacing the lithium battery in the remote

commander

Use a CR2025 lithium battery as power source for the

remote commander. Do not use any battery other than

CR2025.

ZOOM

PUSH SET

SHOTMARK

SUB CLIP

THUMBNAIL

PLAY/PAUSE

STOP

PUSH AFREC PAUSE

REC

FFWDFREV

PREV NEXT

1ZOOM T/W buttons

2SHOT MARK 1/2

buttons

4THUMBNAIL button

5PREV button

6F REV button

7PLAY/PAUSE button

8REC button

0PUSH SET button (four-way arrow key)

qa NEXT button

qs STOP button

qd F FWD button

qf PUSH AF button

3SUB CLIP button

9REC PAUSE button

Insulation sheet

34 Location and Function of Parts

Chapter 1 Overview

Hold down the lock lever (1), and then pull out the

battery holder (2).

Put a new battery in the battery holder with the +

symbol facing upward (1), and then push in the

battery holder until it clicks (2).

Battery may explode if mistreated.

Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type

recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

Battery lifetime

When the lithium battery output falls, even button presses

may not operate. The average lithium battery lifetime is

about one year, but this depends on the pattern of use.

If pressing the remote control buttons produces absolutely

no effect on this unit, replace the battery, then check the

operation again.

WARNING

CAUTION

Face the + symbol upward.

Attaching and Replacing the Lithium Battery

Chapter

Chapter 2 Preparations

Preparations

Attaching and Replacing

the Lithium Battery

This camcorder uses a lithium battery to retain stored data.

When using the camcorder for the first time, be sure to

attach the supplied lithium battery (CR2032). The

camcorder will not operate correctly without this lithium

battery. After attaching the lithium battery, set the date and

time of the internal clock (see “Setting the Date and Time

of the Internal Clock” on page 39).

Use CR2032 lithium batteries only. Other types of lithium

battery may come loose when the camcorder is subjected

to vibrations. If you have difficulty finding CR2032

lithium batteries, contact your Sony dealer.

Set the POWER switch to OFF.

Press down the catch at the top of the battery cover and

open the cover.

Take out the lithium battery.

Reverse step 3 to insert a replacement lithium battery.

Make sure that the + symbol on the battery is facing

you.

Close the battery cover.

Battery may explode if mistreated.

Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type

recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

Bei der Entsorgung leerer Batterien sind die Anweisungen

des Herstellers zu befolgen.

Service life of the lithium battery

When the lithium battery’s voltage falls, the lithium

battery low voltage warning appears on the LCD monitor

(see page 17). If this warning appears, replace the lithium

battery (CR2032) within three or four days.

The lithium battery has an average service life of about one

year.

Note

LITHIUM BATT

Catch

Press down

and pull

forward.

Battery cover

WARNING

CAUTION

Press down and pull out

toward you.

36 Preparing a Power Supply

Chapter 2 Preparations

Preparing a Power Supply

The following power supplies are recommended for the

camcorder.

• BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Lithium-ion Battery Pack

• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC adaptor

Using a Battery Pack

When a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used,

the camcorder will operate continuously for the time

shown below.

The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency

of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature

when used.

Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger suitable

for each battery.

For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the

battery charger operation manual.

A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.

To attach the battery pack

Press the battery pack against the back of the

camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery

pack with the matching line on the camcorder.

Slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow

points at the matching line on the camcorder.

To detach the battery pack

• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS

indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery

pack.

• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing

the battery pack.

Using an AC Adaptor

When using the AC-DN10 AC adaptor

Mount an AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as

a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply.

The AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.

Model name Operating time

BP-GL95 Approx. 160 minutes

BP-GL65 Approx. 100 minutes

BP-L60S Approx. 100 minutes

BP-L80S Approx. 130 minutes

Note

Note on using the battery pack

BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S

Back of the camcorder

Align these lines.

Notes

“LOCK” arrow

Matching line on the

camcorder

Holding this button in, pull

the battery pack up.

to an AC power source

Setting the Area of Use and the Frame Frequency

Chapter 2 Preparations

Setting the Area of Use

and the Frame Frequency

Using the Unit for the First Time

The area of use and the frame frequency are not factory

preset. Before using this unit, you need to set these items.

(You cannot use the unit without setting these items.)

Set the POWER switch to the ON position.

The screen for setting the area of use appears in the

viewfinder.

Press the MENU knob.

The z mark on the left of “NOT SELECTED”

changes to a ? mark, and you can now select the area

of use.

Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of

use.

a) The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with no

Setup. The frame frequency can be selected as any of 60I, 30P, or

23.98P.

b) The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with

Setup (7.5 IRE). The frame frequency can be selected as any of 60I,

30P, or 23.98P.

c) The composite signal output from this unit is a PAL signal. The

frame frequency can be selected as either 50I or 25P.

Set the POWER switch to OFF, then once again to ON.

The unit is now ready for use.

Proceed to the next operation: setting the frame

frequency (see below).

Setting the Frame Frequency

Hold down the MENU knob, and move the MENU

switch to the ON position.

The TOP menu appears.

Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to

“OPERATION”, then press the MENU knob.

The CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu

appears.

Press the MENU knob, then turn the knob to move the

b mark to “FORMAT”.

Press the MENU knob.

MENU switch

POWER switch

MENU knob

C OUNTR Y : NOT SE LE CT ED

PLEA SE S ET CO UN TR Y

AND TU RN OFF ON CE .

FORM AT S ETTIN G

C OUNTR Y : ?NOT SE LE CT ED

PLEA SE S ET CO UN TR Y

AND TU RN OFF ON CE .

FORM AT S ETTIN G

Setting Area of use

NTSC (J) AREA NTSC area (Japan) a)

NTSC AREA NTSC area (for areas other than

Japan) b)

PAL AREA PAL area c)

USER

U SER M EN U CUSTO MI ZE

ALL

OPERA TI ON

PAINT

MAINT EN AN CE

FILE

DIAGN OS IS

0 01.FO RM AT

0 02.SP EC IA L EFF EC TS

0 03.AS SI GN ABLE

0 04.DI SC

0 05.CL IP T ITLE

0 06.FI LE N AMING

0 07.GA IN S W

0 08.EZ M OD E/TLC S

0 09.OF FS ET WHIT E

0 10.VI DE O OUT

TO P?0 00 CO NT EN TS

You can move to another page when a ? mark appears.

38 Setting the Area of Use and the Frame Frequency

Chapter 2 Preparations

The FORMAT page appears.

To change the area of use, press and turn the MENU

knob to move the b mark to “COUNTRY”, then press

the MENU knob.

The b mark beside “COUNTRY” changes to a z

mark, and the z mark beside the setting value changes

to a ? mark.

Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of use

(see step 3 in the previous section).

Refer to steps 5 and 6, and select the frame frequency.

If NTSC (J) AREA/NTSC AREA has been selected

a) More precisely 59.94I.

b) More precisely 29.97P.

c) More precisely 23.98P.

If PAL AREA has been selected

Refer to steps 5 and 6, and set the recording format and

other items as required.

Set the POWER switch to OFF, then once again to ON.

Item Description Setting

SYSTEM Set the frame frequency. 60I a)

30P b)

23.9P c)

Item Description Setting

SYSTEM Set the frame frequency. 50I

25P

S YSTEM : 6 0I

R EC FO RM AT :M PE G HD

B IT RA TE (HD) : SP

A UDIO CH (HD) : 4 ch

A SPECT R AT IO(DV ): 16 :9

C OUNTR Y :

TO P?0 01 FO RM AT

S YSTEM : 6 0I

R EC FO RM AT :M PE G HD

B IT RA TE (HD) : SP

A UDIO CH (HD) : 4 ch

A SPECT R AT IO(DV ): 16 :9

C OUNTR Y :

TO P 0 01 FO RM AT

POWER O FF -> O N! !

S YSTEM : 6 0I

R EC FO RM AT :M PE G HD

B IT RA TE (HD) : SP

A UDIO CH (HD) : 4 ch

A SPECT R AT IO(DV ): 16 :9

C OUNTR Y :?N TS C AR EA

TO P 0 01 FO RM AT

Item Description Setting

REC

FORMAT Set the recording format. MPEG HD

DVCAM

BIT RATE Set the recording mode if

MPEG HD has been

selected.

HQ (high

quality)

SP (standard

play)

LP (long play)

ASPECT

RATIO Set the aspect ratio if

DVCAM has been selected. 16:9

4:3

AUDIO CH Set the number of audio

recording channels if

MPEG HD has been

selected.

2CH

4CH

Setting the Date and Time of the Internal Clock

Chapter 2 Preparations

Setting the Date and Time

of the Internal Clock

You can set the date and time of the internal clock. The

date and time set here are reflected in timecode.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the TIME/DATE page of the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select ADJUST, and press the MENU knob.

The TIME ADJUST screen appears.

Select a desired setting item, and press the MENU

knob.

You can set the following items in the TIME ADJUST

screen.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have set all of the

desired items.

When you are finished making settings, select OK, and

press the MENU knob.

The internal clock is set with the date and time set in

steps 3 to 5. The TIME/DATE page of the

OPERATION menu appears again. The time set in the

TIME ADJUST screen is displayed.

To cancel the setting

Before executing step 6, select ESC and press the MENU

knob.

All the settings so far made are discarded and the TIME/

DATE page appears again.

Item Description

HOUR Sets the hour value.

MIN Sets the minutes value.

SEC Sets the seconds value.

YEAR Sets the year.

MONTH Sets the month.

DAY Sets the day.

A DJUST : EX EC

H OUR : 12

M IN : 55

S EC : 58

Y EAR : 00

M ONTH : 07

D AY : 31

TO P?0 18 TI ME /D ATE

40 Preparing the Lens

Chapter 2 Preparations

Preparing the Lens

Mounting the Lens

First power off the unit, and then mount the lens using the

following procedure.

(To mount a 1/2-inch type lens, carry out steps 1 to 3.)

For information about using the lens, refer to the

operating instructions for the lens.

Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens

mount cap from the lens mount.

Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in

the lens mount, and insert the lens into the mount.

Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever

down to lock the lens.

If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while

the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious

accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is

recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be

put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above.

Mounting a 2/3-inch type lens requires a 2/3-inch type

lens mount adaptor.

If a 2/3-inch type lens has been mounted, connect the

lens cable to the LENS connector.

Connecting the lens cable to the LENS connector

when the camcorder is powered may cause a

malfunction of the camcorder or the lens. Before

connecting the lens cable, be sure to check that the

camcorder is powered off.

Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.

Adjusting the Flange Focal Length

If the focus is not precisely correct at the telephoto and

wide-angle ends of zoom operations, adjust the flange

focal length (the distance from the lens mounting flange

plane to the focusing plane).

Once adjusted, no further adjustment is required unless the

lens is changed.

When carrying out the adjustment, use the supplied flange

focal length adjustment chart as the subject.

If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move the

camera or subject during adjustment, this will cause an

adjustment error.

Carrying out the adjustment

When using the VCL-719BXS Auto Focus Lens

With the VCL-719BXS lens supplied with the PDW-

F330K, zoom and focus operations automatically adjust

the flange focal length.

Caution

Note

245

Lens mount

securing rubber

Note

Flange focal length

adjustment chart (supplied)

Approx. 3 m

Preparing the Lens

Chapter 2 Preparations

Open the iris, position the supplied flange focal length

adjustment chart approximately 3 meters away from

the camera, and arrange the lighting to obtain a

satisfactory video output.

Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO (power zoom mode).

Hold down the flange focal length adjustment button

for 3 seconds.

The auto focus indicator flashes orange, and the flange

focal length adjustment starts.

During adjustment

The auto focus indicator flashes alternately orange and

green.

The message “AUTO FB EXECUTING” appears on

the viewfinder screen.

If the adjustment completes correctly

The auto focus indicator goes off, and the message on

the viewfinder screen changes to “FB: OK”.

If the flange focal length adjustment does not

complete correctly

The auto focus indicator lights red.

Check the subject and lighting conditions, and repeat

the adjustment.

When using a non-auto focus lens

Read the instruction manual for the lens in use as well.

Set the iris to manual.

Open the iris, position the supplied flange focal length

adjustment chart approximately 3 meters away from

the camera, and arrange the lighting to obtain a

satisfactory video output.

Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange

focal length adjustment ring).

Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.

Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring

and focus on the chart.

Set the zoom ring to wide angle.

Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus,

being careful not to disturb the focus ring.

Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus ring.

Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.

MACRO

PUSH

FOCUS

ON OFF

SERVO MANU.

ZOOM

RET

IRIS

Flange focal length

adjustment button

Auto focus indicator

Zoom ringFocus ring

ZOOM switch

42 Adjusting the Viewfinder

Chapter 2 Preparations

Adjusting the Viewfinder

Depending on the eyesight of the operator — whether

longsighted or shortsighted — the optimal position of the

viewfinder image varies. Adjusting brightness, contrast,

and so on, improves the visibility of the viewfinder screen.

Although these adjustments may make the viewfinder

image clearer, they have no effect on the output video

signal from the camcorder.

(The description shown below uses the DXF-801/801CE

illustrations; it also applies to the DXF-20W.)

Since the fitting dimensions are different on the camera

and viewfinder, to attach a DXF-20W (not supplied) to the

PDW-F330, it is necessary to change the fitting (supplied

with the DXF-20W).

Detaching the Viewfinder

Remove any microphone from the viewfinder beforehand.

Power off this unit, then unplug the viewfinder

connector from the VF connector.

Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring

1, and with the stopper raised 2, detach the

viewfinder 3.

To attach the viewfinder

Reverse the detaching procedure. (Note that it is not

necessary to raise the stopper.)

Note the following points when mounting the viewfinder.

• Be sure to power off this unit before plugging the

viewfinder connector into the VF connector on this unit.

If the connector is plugged in while the power is on, the

viewfinder may not operate correctly.

• Make sure that the viewfinder connector is pushed fully

into the VF connector on the unit. If the connector is not

firmly connected, the image may break up, or the tally

light may not operate properly.

Using a left eye adaptor (DXF-801 only)

By fitting a left eye adaptor, you can use the camcorder

with your left eye to the viewfinder.

You cannot stow the camcorder in the carrying case with

the left-eye adaptor attached.

For details, consult your Sony dealer.

Adjusting the Viewfinder Position

To adjust the viewfinder left-to-right position, loosen the

left-to-right positioning ring, and to adjust the front-to-

back position, loosen the front-to-back positioning knob.

Note

F330

VF connector

Notes

Note

Viewfinder left-to-right

positioning ring

Stopper

Adjusting the Viewfinder

Chapter 2 Preparations

Adjusting the Eyepiece Focus and

the Screen (Brightness, Contrast,

and Outline Emphasis)

a) For the DXF-20W, the eyepiece focusing ring.

To adjust the eyepiece focus

First focus the image with the lens, then adjust the

eyepiece focusing knob or eyepiece focusing ring to get

the clearest viewfinder image for your eyesight.

The visual adjustment range is –3D to 0D (DXF-801) or

–3.5D to +0.4D (DXF-20W).

You can change the adjustment range by installing an

exchange part. The adjustment range after the exchange is

as follows.

• DXF-801: –2D to +1D, or –0.5D to +3D

• DXF-20W: –3.6D to –0.8D, or –2.8D to +2.0D

Contact a Sony service representative for more

information about exchange parts.

To adjust contrast and brightness

Carry out these adjustments with the color bars displayed.

Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to the BARS position.

The color bars appear on the viewfinder screen.

Watching the color bars, turn the CONTRAST and

BRIGHT controls to adjust the contrast and

brightness.

Return the OUTPUT/DCC switch to its original

position.

To adjust the outline emphasis

Turning the PEAKING control changes the degree of

outline emphasis in the viewfinder image, to make

focusing easier.

Attaching a 5-inch Electronic

Viewfinder

You can attach an optional DXF-51 (5-inch) Electronic

Viewfinder. To attach it, an Accessory Shoe Kit (service

part number: A-8274-968-B) is required.

For details, contact your Sony dealer.

Remove the cover of the grip, and attach the shoe and

stopper screw (of the Accessory Shoe Kit).

a) Supplied with the Accessory Shoe Kit

Viewfinder left-to-right

positioning ring

Viewfinder front-to-back

positioning knob

Eyepiece focusing knob a)

BRIGHT control

CONTRAST control

OUTPUT/DCC switch

PEAKING control VF Cable

Guide plate

Fixing ring

Shoe a)

Stopper screw a)

44 Using the Shoulder Strap / Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position

Chapter 2 Preparations

Using the Shoulder Strap

Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting.

Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the

other side of the grip in the same way as in step 1.

To remove the shoulder strap

Adjusting the Shoulder

Pad Position

You can shift the shoulder pad backward or forward by up

to 35 mm (1 7/16 inches). This adjustment helps you get the

best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your

shoulder.

Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to

unlock the shoulder pad.

Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is

in the most convenient position.

Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the

selected position.

Clip Pull up the strap to lock

the fitting.

Pull in the direction of the arrow

while pressing here.

1,3

Bottom of the

camcorder

Shoulder pad

Mounting on a Tripod / Using a Video Light

Chapter 2 Preparations

Mounting on a Tripod

First fit the VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor to the tripod, then

mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.

The camcorder cannot be mounted on a tripod adaptor with

one of the following indications in the model name space,

as shown in the above illustration. Use the appropriate

tripod adaptor.

• “VCT-U14” only

• “VCT-U14-B”

• “VCT-U14-D”

To remove the tripod

After removing the camcorder, if the tripod adaptor pin has

not returned to its original position, hold down the red

button and move the lever in the direction of the arrow to

return the pin to its original position. It is not possible to

mount a camcorder with the pin left out.

Using a Video Light

With this camcorder, you can use the Anton Bauer

Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light (powered by 12 V

with maximum power consumption of 50 W).

• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on

the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you

can turn the light on and off automatically as you start

and stop the VDR operation.

• The output of the video light connector on the camcorder

is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is

supplied with 12 V or more power (through the DC IN

connector or battery pack). The brightness or color

temperature of the light will not change according to

voltage increase.

• Do not use a video light with power consumption of over

50 W.

• The brightness or color temperature of the light will

change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN

connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.

To attach the video light

Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on the

camcorder grip, and connect the video light cable to the

LIGHT connector.

The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the 1/4-inch

tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slide-

type shoe, contact your Sony dealer.

Note

Slide the camcorder forward along the

slot, until it clicks firmly into place.

VCT-U14 Tripod

Adaptor Tripod

Model name space

Hold down the red button and pull the

lever in the direction of the arrow.

Notes

46 Preparing the Audio Input System

Chapter 2 Preparations

Preparing the Audio Input

System

Using the Supplied Microphone

Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder

clamp.

Place the microphone in the microphone holder.

Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector,

then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on

which you want to record the audio from this

microphone to FRONT (or F).

To use the microphone detached from the

camcorder

You can use the supplied microphone detached from the

camcorder.

When using the supplied microphone with an extension

cable, always use an external power supply type cable.

Using an External Microphone

You can connect up to two external monaural microphones

to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, using a CAC-12

Microphone Holder (not supplied).

The following is the procedure for attaching an electret

condenser microphone such as the ECM-673/674/678.

Remove the fixing screws for external microphone

holder.

Attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder.

Open the CAC-12 and remove the microphone

adaptor.

Clamp of the microphone holder

Place the microphone in the

holder so that “UP” is at the top

Tighten the screw.

Close the microphone holder.

Connect to the MIC IN connector.

Note

Set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you

want to record the audio to FRONT (or F).

Connect to the MIC IN connector.

CAC-12

crews removed in step 1

Preparing the Audio Input System

Chapter 2 Preparations

When attaching an ECM-673/674/678, use the

microphone adaptor supplied with the ECM-673/674/

678.

Place an external microphone (electret condenser

microphone such as the ECM-673/674/678) in the

CAC-12.

Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH-

1 or CH-2 connector.

Set the switches as follows.

• Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch as

indicated below, depending on the type of

microphone used.

-When using a microphone with an internal

power supply, set it to MIC (center).

-When using a microphone with an external

power supply, set it to MIC +48V ON (right).

• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4) switch

for the channel to which the microphone is

connected to REAR (or R).

Switch the input level to match the sensitivity of the

microphone used.

Switch the input level by changing the REAR MIC

REF setting on the AUDIO-1 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu (factory default setting is –60

dB).

For more details, see page 122.

• If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate

setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud sounds may

be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio may be

affected.

• In order for the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors

on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V

power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted.

If the microphone cable has a female connector, use an

adaptor.

• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once

you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to

lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12. After detaching

the CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws back into their

original places.

Attaching a UHF Synthesized Tuner

You can record sound by using a wireless microphone

system consisting of the following.

• WRT-804/807S UHF Wireless Microphone

• WRT-822/824 UHF Synthesized Transmitter

• WRR-855/861/862 UHF Synthesized Tuner

For details on using the wireless microphone system, see

the operating instructions for the microphone and tuner.

To attach a WRR-855

Open the cover of the WRR connector.

Microphone adaptor

Open the CAC-12.

Loosen the screw.

ECM-673/674/678 or

similar microphone

Close the CAC-12.

Tighten the screw.

Notes

to AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2

connector

Monaural microphone

AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2)

switches

48 Preparing the Audio Input System

Chapter 2 Preparations

Set the power switch of the WRR-855 to ON, and set

MUTING to ON or OFF.

This enables the WRR-855 power to be turned on and

off with the camcorder POWER switch.

Insert the WRR-855 into the CA-WR855.

Engage the V-shaped plate on the back of the

CA-WR855 with the V-groove on the battery

attachment shoe, and then slide the CA-WR855 down

until it connects to the WRR connector.

Set the AUDIO IN switch to WIRELESS (or W).

To attach a WRR-861/862 (When using a

BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery Pack)

Attach a WRR tuner fitting (not supplied, service part

number: A-8278-057-B) to the back of the camcorder.

1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the four

screws placed in the tuner fitting as illustrated

below.

Check that the four screws are firmly tightened.

2 Loosen the adjustment screws of the tuner fitting.

3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP-GL95/

GL65/L60S/L80S Battery Pack to be attached, and

tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position.

4 Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR-

861/862.

Attach the battery pack.

For details about attaching the battery pack, see

“Using a Battery Pack” on page 36.

Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting.

For details about the WRR tuner fitting (service part

number: A-8278-057-B), contact your Sony dealer.

Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT

connector of the camcorder, and the audio output cable

to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.

Set the switches as follows.

• Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch to MIC for

the channel to which the audio output cable is

connected.

• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4) switch

for the channel to which the audio output cable is

connected to REAR (or R).

Note

WRR connector

Fasten the screws

(supplied with the WRR-855).

CA-WR855

Phillips type screwdriver

BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S

Back of the

camcorder

Mount plate (supplied

with WRR-861/862)

Adjustment

screws

WRR-861/862

Connecting the Remote Control Unit

Chapter 2 Preparations

Connecting Line Input Audio

Equipment

Connect an audio mixer or other external audio system

component to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connector as

shown below.

Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch to LINE for

the channel to which the external audio equipment is

connected.

Selection of the recording audio input

Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4) switch for

the channel to which the audio device is connected to

REAR (or R).

Connecting the Remote

Control Unit

Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit

enables remote control of the principal camera and VDR

functions.

Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE

connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into

remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control

unit, the remote control mode is cancelled.

Refer to the RM-B150/B750 Operation Manual for the

maximum cable length for connections between the

camcorder and the RM-B150/B750.

Before connecting/disconnecting the remote control unit

to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder

POWER switch.

Camcorder switch functions when the

remote control unit is connected

Connecting the remote control unit disables the following

switches on the camcorder.

• GAIN switch

• OUTPUT/DCC switch

• WHITE BAL switch

• AUTO W/B BAL switch

• SHUTTER switch

Paint adjustment when the remote control

unit is connected

The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the

last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.

When the monitor is connected to the

remote control unit

The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-B150/

B750 outputs the same signal as that from the VIDEO

OUT connector on the camcorder.

LINE MIC

+48V ON

FRONT

WIRELESS

REAR

AUDIO IN

to audio mixer, etc.

AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switch:

Set to REAR.

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2

connector

AUDIO IN input selection switch:

Set to LINE.

Note

RM-B150/B750

REMOTE

connector

Remote control cable

50 Connecting the Remote Control Unit

Chapter 2 Preparations

Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/B750 to

connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the

RM-B150/B750.

When the remote control unit is

disconnected from the camcorder

The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect

before the remote control unit was connected.

Structure of the paint adjustment data

The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for

storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as

shown below: one is the “independent data region” that is

used when a remote control unit is not connected, and the

other is the “remote control data region” that is used when

a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is

automatically selected and output to the camera section

depending on whether or not a remote control unit such as

the RM-B150 is connected.

Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to the

camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the

“remote control data region” and the settings of the paint

adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote

control unit was used are recalled.

The settings of the absolute value rotational controls 1) and

absolute value switches 2) are overwritten by those on the

remote control unit after the remote control unit is

connected.

When the remote control unit is disconnected from the

camcorder, the “independent data region” becomes

effective. Thus the camcorder will return to the settings

that were in effect before the remote control unit was

connected.

1) Absolute value rotational controls: The data corresponding to the

angular position of controls is output. Rotational controls for which the

data corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output are called

relative value controls.

2) Absolute value switches: Like toggle switches or slide switches (except

momentary switches), the switches (or knobs) whose positions must

coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches.

Non-volatile memory

Independent data

region

MASTER BLACK

MASTER GAMMA

KNEE POINT

DETAIL LEVEL

R/B GAIN

R/B BLACK

Remote control

data region

MASTER BLACK

MASTER GAMMA

KNEE POINT

DETAIL LEVEL

R/B GAIN

R/B BLACK

Setup

menu of

the

camcorder

RM-B150

Hardware

of the

camera

section

RM-B150 connected

RM-B150 not

connected

Connecting

Chapter 2 Preparations

Connecting

Some of the peripheral devices and related products

referred to in this section may be no longer in production.

When selecting the devices, consult your Sony dealer.

Connecting an External Video

Monitor

When using a Sony liquid crystal display monitor, make

the connections as follows.

aTo check an analog HD/SD (NTSC/PAL) signal

Connect the VIDEO OUT Y/PB/PR connectors of this unit

and the RGB/COMPONENT input connectors of the

LMD-9030 liquid crystal display monitor with a

component video cable (not supplied).

The signal output from the VIDEO OUT Y/PB/PR

connectors can be switched with “COMPONENT OUT”

on the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu. For more

details, see page 114.

It is not possible to add text information or markers to the

HD output.

bTo check an SD (NTSC/PAL) signal

Connect the VIDEO OUT connector of this unit and the

LINE A or LINE B input connector of the LMD-9030

liquid crystal display monitor with a 75" coaxial cable

(not supplied).

aTo check an HDSDI signal

Connect the HDSDI OUT connector of this unit and the

SDI input connector of the LMD-9050 liquid crystal

display monitor with a 75" coaxial cable (not supplied).

Note that regardless of the recording format (MPEG HD/

DVCAM), during recording or while recording is stopped

an HD signal is output.

• When playing back video recorded in SD format

(DVCAM format), no signal is output from the HDSDI

OUT connector.

• Text information and markers cannot be superimposed

on the HDSDI output.

bTo check an SD (NTSC/PAL) signal

Connect the VIDEO OUT connector of this unit and the

LINE A or LINE B input connector of the LMD-9050

liquid crystal display monitor with a 75" coaxial cable

(not supplied).

The items displayed on a monitor are same as the ones on

the viewfinder screen. For details, see “Status Display on

the Viewfinder Screen” on page 31.

Using an i.LINK Connection

Using the (i.LINK) DV OUT S400 connector, you can

connect external equipment to the camcorder.

Video recorded in the MPEG HD format is down-

converted to the DVCAM format and output from the

(i.LINK) DV OUT S400 connector.

Note

F330

Note

275" coaxial

cable

PDW-F330

LMD-9030 liquid crystal

display monitor

to VIDEO OUT Y/PB/PR connector

to LINE A/B input connector

to VIDEO OUT

connector

to RGB/COMPONENT

input connector

1 Component video cable

F350

Notes

175" coaxial

cable

PDW-F350

LMD-9050

liquid crystal display monitor

to VIDEO OUT connector

to SDI input connector

to HDSDI OUT

connector

to LINE A/B input

connector

275" coaxial cable

52 Connecting

Chapter 2 Preparations

For connections using FAM (file access mode), see “File

Operation” (page 155).

Settings required for an i.LINK connection

i.LINK MODE setting

Set the method of connection between this unit and an

external device. On the OUTPUT page of the

OPERATION menum, set i.LINK MODE to AV/C

(Audio/Video Control). (The factory default setting is AV/

C.)

Make the i.LINK AUDIO OUT setting depending on the

connected device (see the next item).

i.LINK AUDIO OUT setting

Set the audio output channels for the (i.LINK) DV OUT

S400 connector. On the AUDIO-2 page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, set i.LINK AUDIO OUT to one

of the following. (The factory default setting is “2CH”.)

2CH: Output channels 1 and 2 (16 bits, 48 ksps)

4CH: Output channels 1 to 4 (12 bits, 32 ksps)

When the scan mode is 23.98P, video, audio, or timecode

output via the i.LINK connection may not be continuous.

Using the camcorder as a feeder

To copy digitally from the camcorder to the VTR

without the editing function

Using an i.LINK cable (DV cable) to connect a digital

video cassette recorder with an i.LINK connector to the

camcorder, digital copy of video and audio can be carried

out.

Example of connection

Make the following settings to prepare the external

VTR.

• Set REC MODE to the same recording mode as that

of the camcorder.

• In NTSC color system, when the recording mode is

set to DVCAM, select either DF or NDF.

• Set AUDIO MODE to either 4-channel or 2-channel

mode, according to the disc that is played on the

camcorder.

Pause recording on the external VTR.

Play the disc on the camcorder.

Check the playback on the camcorder, and when

playback reaches the scene that you want to record,

start recording again on the external VTR.

The copy to the external VTR starts.

When copy to the external VTR is finished, stop

playback of the disc on the camcorder.

For details about external VTR operations, see the

instruction manual supplied with the external VTR.

To control the camcorder from a VTR with editing

function

By connecting a VTR with an i.LINK connector to the

(i.LINK) DV OUT S400 connector of the camcorder using

an i.LINK cable (DV cable), you can control playback and

recording on the camcorder and perform cut editing and

digital copy.

Example of connection

When using the DSR-2000A/2000AP, press the i.LINK

button on the remote control setting section of the VTR.

To use the automatic copying function of the DSR-2000A/

2000AP, it is necessary to set the recording format of the

camcorder to DVCAM on the FORMAT page of the

OPERATION menu.

For details on the external VTR, see the instruction manual

supplied with the external VTR.

To control the camcorder from a nonlinear

editing system

Using the i.LINK cable (DV cable), you can transfer video

and audio signals to a nonlinear editing system from the

camcorder. Editing software that supports the selected

recording format (DVCAM) must be used.

Note

External VTR

DSR-1800A/1800AP/

45/45P, etc.

PDW-F330/F330P/F350/F350P

i.LINK cable

(DV cable)

Note

External VTR

PDW-F330/F330P/F350/F350P

DSR-2000A/2000AP, etc.

i.LINK cable

(DV cable)

Connecting

Chapter 2 Preparations

Example of connection

Operate the computer to set up the nonlinear editing

software.

For details, see the software’s manual.

• Video edited using a nonlinear editing system cannot be

recorded to disc on this camcorder via an i.LINK cable

(DV cable).

• When a disc with non-continuous timecode recorded is

subjected to video capturing on a nonlinear editing

system, the capturing precision may not be frame

accurate.

Connecting Using the HDSDI

Connector

By connecting the HDSDI OUT connector of this unit and

the HDSDI input connector of the HDCAM VTR with a

75" coaxial cable (not supplied), you can carry out digital

copy.

Connections for Using the PDZ-1

To use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software,

connect the computer on which PDZ-1 is installed to this

unit in FAM (file access mode).

For details of the connection, see “Making FAM

connections” on page 158.

For details of PDZ-1, see “Using the PDZ-1 Proxy

Browsing Software” on page 102.

Notes

F350

A computer in which

editing software

supporting the DVCAM

format is installed

PDW-F330/F330P/F350/F350P

i.LINK cable

(DV cable)

Laptop computer

75" coaxial

cable

PDW-F350

HDCAM VTR

(HDW-2000 or similar)

to HDSDI input connector

to HDSDI OUT

connector

Chapter3

54 Handling Discs

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Recording and Playback

Handling Discs

Discs Used for Recording and

Playback

This camcorder uses the following disc for recording and

playback:

PFD23 Professional Disc (capacity 23.3 GB)

It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or

playback:

• Blu-ray Disc

• Professional Disc for Data

Notes on Handling

Handling

The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is

designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or

fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a

severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in

damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it

may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back

the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be

handled and stored carefully.

• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the

cartridge.

• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage.

• Do not disassemble the cartridge.

• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for

indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position.

Storage

• Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct

sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or

humidity is high.

• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain

ingress.

• Store cartridges in their cases.

Care of the discs

• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using

a soft dry cloth.

• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before

use.

Write-Protecting Discs

To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental

erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of

the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the

following figure.

You can also write protect individual clips. For details, see

“Locking (Write-protecting) Clips” (page 87).

Note

SAVE

SAVE SAVE

Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab

Slide in the direction

of the arrow

Write Inhibit tab settings

Recording enabled Recording disabled

Handling Discs

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Loading and Unloading a Disc

Loading a disc

Proceed as follows.

Turn on the POWER switch.

If there is condensation inside the VDR section, the

message “HUMID” appears in the status display on

the LCD monitor. If this happens, wait until the

indicator goes off before going on to step 2.

Press the EJECT button.

This opens the lid of the disc compartment.

Insert the disc in the V direction, and close the disc

compartment lid manually.

The disc is loaded.

To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the

camcorder is in the upright position (the grip upside,

the bottom downside).

Unloading a disc

With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open

the disc compartment lid and eject the disc, then remove

the disc. If you are not going to insert another disc, close

the disc compartment lid.

Formatting a Disc

Using a new disc

An unused disc requires no formatting operation. The disc

is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when

loaded into this unit.

Using a disc on which material is recorded

To format a recorded disc, load the disc into the unit then

do as follows.

When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the disc

is erased. (Locked clips (see page 87) are also erased.)

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the DISC page of the USER

(or OPERATION) menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details of menu operations, see page 131.

Select QUICK FORMAT, and press the MENU knob.

The message “EXECUTE OK? YES b NO” appears.

To carry out the formatting, select YES, and press the

MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving NO selected.

When formatting is completed, the message

“COMPLETED” appears.

Note

POWER switch

HUMID indicator

EJECT button

Lid of the disc

compartment

Insert the disc.

V indication on the outside

Push and close the lid.

Note

D ELETE L AS T CLI P: EX EC

D ELETE A LL CLIP S: EX EC

Q UICK FO RM AT : EX EC

TO P 0 04 DI SC

56 Handling Discs

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Handling of Discs When Recording

Does Not End Normally (Salvage

Function)

Recording processing does not end normally if, for

example, the battery pack is removed during recording, or

if the power cord is disconnected during recording.

Because the file system is not updated, video and audio

data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip

contents recorded up to that point are lost.

However, this unit has a salvage function which can hold

losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such

discs.

Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the

POWER switch is set to OFF and when battery exhaustion

is detected, because the unit does not become powered off

until after the end of recording processing.

• Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until

recording processing has finished and the ACCESS

indicator has gone out.

• This function salvages as much recorded material as

possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%

restoration cannot be guaranteed.

• Even when this function is used, it is not possible to

recover data from immediately before the interruption of

recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.

Quick salvage: From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the

interruption of recording.

Full salvage: From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the

interruption of recording.

• More data may be lost when functions such as Interval

Rec are being used.

Quick salvage

When the unit is powered on again after a recording

interruption due to a power interruption, with the disc still

loaded in the unit, clips are reconstructed on the basis of

backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers

recorded on the disc. Processing time is about 5 seconds.

Full salvage

When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted

because of a power interruption, and a disc is manually

ejected from that device with the power off, clips are

reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc

when the disc is loaded in this unit. Therefore, processing

takes longer than for a quick salvage (about 30 seconds,

although it depends on the state of the disc).

Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage.

Insert the disc on which recording did not end

normally.

The following salvage message appears.

Select YES, and press the MENU knob.

Salvage processing starts, and the message

“EXECUTING.” appears.

A results message appears when the processing

finishes.

• If the salvage succeeded, the message

“COMPLETED.” appears.

• If the salvage failed, the message

“INCOMPLETED.” appears. Clips for which

recording did not end normally are lost.

To exit without salvaging

Select NO in step 2 to exit without performing salvage

processing.

However, the status of the disc does not change.

Salvage is still required to recover the clips for which

recording did not end normally. The salvage message

will appear again when that disc is inserted again, or

when the camcorder is powered on again.

If salvage processing is not done, sections which were

recorded normally can be played back, but no new

recording can be done on the disc.

Notes

Note

TO R EC ORD O N TH E

DISC, I T IS NE CE SS AR Y

TO E XE CU TE SA LV AG E.

S AL VA GE OK ?

Y ES NO

S AL VAGE

Basic Procedure for Shooting

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Basic Procedure for

Shooting

Set the POWER switch to ON.

Set the FILTER selector and the 5600K button

appropriately for the lighting conditions.

a) The range over which the subject is sharply in focus. Thus, “reducing

the depth of field” means that the range is reduced as well, and

“increasing the depth of field” means that it is increasing as well.

Check the switch settings on the camcorder.

If you do not have enough time to check the settings of

the unit, you can turn the EZ MODE-assigned switch

on to use EZ mode for instant shooting.

EZ mode

In EZ mode, the settings of this unit are fixed at

standard values, and the lens aperture and white

balance are adjusted automatically. In this state, it is

not possible to change menu or other settings. To

change settings, turn EZ mode off. In the factory

default configuration, the ASSIGN 1 switch (see page

142) turns EZ mode on and off.

Check the settings in the menu.

Check the lens settings and flange focal length

adjustment (see page 40).

Adjust the viewfinder eyepiece focus, and the contrast

and brightness of the viewfinder image (see page 42).

Check the audio system settings.

• Microphone connections (see page 46)

• Settings on the VDR section (see page 20)

If necessary, display the center marker and/or safety

zone marker on the viewfinder screen.

For details, see “Setting the Marker Display” on

page 137.

Also, press the ZEBRA button to display a zebra

pattern on the viewfinder screen.

If necessary, adjust the white balance and black

balance (see page 59).

If necessary, adjust the iris and gain.

For details about the adjustment of iris, see “Iris ring”

on page 27, and “Adjusting the Iris” on page 64.

For details about the adjustment of gain, see “GAIN

switch” on page 15, and “Setting Gain Values for the

GAIN Switch Positions” on page 140.

Turn the focus ring so that the subject is sharply in

focus.

The EZ focus function allows you to set the aperture

function to open, and to easily and precisely adjust the

focus before shooting.

Before use, this function must be assigned to the

ASSIGN 1 or 2 switch.

For details, see “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN

Switches” (page 142).

About the EZ focus function

When you press the switch to which this function is

assigned (the ASSIGN 1 or 2 switch), the function is

turned on and “EZ FOCUS” appears in the viewfinder

screen and the LCD monitor. To turn the function off,

press the switch again. Even if you do not press the

switch, the function goes off automatically after 10

seconds.

The EZ focus function goes off automatically if it is on

when you press the REC button on this unit or the lens.

Recording starts immediately thereafter.

FILTER selector

setting

Examples of shooting

conditions

1 (CLEAR) Indoor shooting

2 (1/4 ND) Cloudy or rainy outdoor shooting,

or to reduce the depth of field a)

3 (1/16 ND) Sunlight

4 (1/64 ND) To reduce the depth of field in

sunlight

1 8 2

11 12,13

Note

58 Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Set up the VDR section according to your shooting

objects, then start recording by pressing the REC

button.

• During recording, the REC/TALLY indicator in the

viewfinder lights, and “REC” appears on the

viewfinder screen.

• You can use the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front

of the camcorder to manually adjust the channel 1

audio level. To do this, you must first set up the VDR

section to enable manual adjustment of the audio

recording level (see page 65).

To pause recording, press the REC button again.

The REC/TALLY indicator in the viewfinder goes off.

The material recorded from step 12 to step 13 is saved

as a single clip.

To play back the recorded clip

Press the PREV button, then press the PLAY/PAUSE

button to play from the beginning of the clip.

Repeat steps 12 and 13 as required to continue

shooting.

Successive clips are recorded on the disc.

• It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2

seconds. If you stop recording within 2 seconds of

starting, this results in a 2-second clip.

If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of

the original start, this creates a single continuous clip

from the original start time.

• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded

on a single disc is 300. If an attempt is made to

record more than 300 clips, the error message “DISC

FULL!” appears, even if there is free capacity on the

disc.

Recording – Basic

Operations

Selecting the Recording Format

Before recording, select the recording format.

There are restrictions on the recording formats that can be

combined on a single disc.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the FORMAT page of the USER (or

OPERATION) menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details of menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

If you have changed the setting of SYSTEM or

COUNTRY, power off the unit, then power on again.

Notes

REC

START

REC

STOP

REC

START

REC

STOP

REC

START

REC

STOP

Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3

Note

Item Description Settings

SYSTEM Frame

frequency NTSC: 60I/30P/23.9P

PAL: 50I/25P

REC

FORMAT Recording

format MPEG HD/DVCAM

BIT RATE

(HD) Bit rate for HD

recording HQ/SP/LP !+,-$

.#/&01"2$"##$/3#$/&41#$

/0/1#.$560/$-&/#$"#//07'$

&7.$-#8,-.07'$/09#:;*

AUDIO CH

(HD) Number of

audio channels

for HD

recording

2ch/4ch

ASPECT

RATIO Aspect ratio for

DVCAM

recording

16:9/4:3

COUNTRY Region of use NTSC/PAL

TO P 0 01 FO RM AT

S YSTEM : 6 0I

R EC FO RM AT : M PE G HD

B IT RA TE ( HD) : SP

A UDIO CH ( HD) : 4 ch

A SPECT R AT IO(DV ): 16 :9

C OUNTR Y : NTS C( J) AR EA

Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the all of the desired items.

Bit rate setting and recording time

a) In HQ mode or LP mode, as a result of MPEG2 compression, the recording

time varies depending on the volume of the generated compressed image

data, with the above figures as a minimum. For example, in material with

little movement, the recording time may be significantly longer than

shown above.

Combining recording formats on a single disc

If any of the following items is set differently, recordings

cannot be combined on a single disc.

• SYSTEM

• REC FORMAT

• AUDIO CH

• COUNTRY

Adjusting the Black Balance/White

Balance

To ensure excellent image quality when using this

camcorder, conditions may require that both the black

balance and the white balance be adjusted.

If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started,

messages that report on the progress and results are

displayed on the viewfinder screen.

Black balance and white balance adjustment values that

are automatically set by the camcorder and the various

settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained

even when the power is turned off.

To adjust the black balance

The black balance will require adjustment in the following

cases.

• When the camcorder is used for the first time

• When the camcorder has not been used for a long time

• When the camcorder is used under conditions in which

the surrounding temperature has changed greatly

• When the GAIN switch (L/M/H) values have been

changed on the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION

It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when

using the camcorder after it has been off.

In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are

performed in the following order: clamp level, black set,

and black balance.

Power the camcorder on, and set the OUTPUT/DCC

switch to CAM.

Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK and release

the switch.

The switch returns to the center position, and the

adjustment is executed.

During adjustment, the following message is displayed

on the viewfinder screen.

The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds

with the message “ABB: OK” and the adjustment

value is automatically stored in memory.

• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is

automatically closed.

• During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection

circuit is automatically activated so you may see

flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a

malfunction.

Bit rate Audio channels

used

Recording time

HQ mode a)

Variable bit rate,

upper limit 35

Mbps

4 channels At least 65

minutes

2 channels At least 68

minutes

SP mode

Fixed bit rate, 25

Mbps

4 channels At least 85

minutes

2 channels At least 90

minutes

LP mode a)

Variable bit rate,

upper limit 18

Mbps

4 channels At least 112

minutes

2 channels At least 122

minutes

Note

Notes

2 1

AB B: EXECU TI NG

- BL AC K SET -

The messages

change in the

following

sequence:

-BLACK SET-

-BLACK

BALANCE-

60 Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be

made

If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed

normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds

on the viewfinder screen.

If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the

black balance adjustment. Keep pushing the WHT/BLK

switch to BLK until “-BLACK SET-” appears after “-

BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error message

occurs repeatedly, contact your Sony dealer.

To adjust the white balance

It is necessary to adjust the white balance each time the

principal lighting source changes.

When this unit is operating in EZ mode, the ATW function

(see page 62) is forced to ON.

Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure

below.

a) White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the

WHITE SWITCH item is set to MEM on the WHITE SETTING

page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

Set the FILTER selector and the 5600K button to suit

the lighting conditions.

The following table shows which FILTER selector

setting you should use depending on the lighting

conditions.

If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a

message reporting the new setting appears for about 3

seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress

message display area of the viewfinder screen.

Place a white test card under the same lighting

conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to

it.

Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a

wall can be used.

The absolute minimum white area is as follows.

Error message Meaning

ABB: NG

IRIS NOT CLOSED The lens iris did not close. Check if

the lens cable is connected properly.

ABB: NG

TIME LIMIT Adjustment could not be completed

within the standard number of

attempts.

ABB: NG

R (or G or B):

OVERFLOW

The difference between the

reference value and the current

value is so great that it exceeds the

range.

Note

FILTER selector

setting

Lighting conditions

1 (CLEAR) Indoor shooting

2 (1/4 ND) Cloudy or rainy outdoor shooting, or

to reduce the depth of field

3 (1/16 ND) Sunlight

4 (1/64 ND) To reduce the depth of field in

sunlight

FILTER selector

WHITE BAL switch: A or B a)

OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM

GAIN switch: Set as low as

possible.

Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle.

Adjust the lens iris.

Manually adjusted lens: Set the iris to an appropriate

setting.

Lens with automatic iris: Set the automatic/manual

switch on the lens to automatic.

Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHT, and then

release the switch.

The switch returns to the center position, and the

adjustment is executed.

During adjustment, the message “AWB:

EXECUTING” is displayed on the viewfinder screen.

The white balance is adjusted in about one second, and

the message “AWB: OK” appears. The adjustment

setting is automatically stored in the memory (A or B)

that was selected in step 1.

• The color temperature display that appears after

white balance adjustment is calculated on the basis

of the R/G/B signal output from the camera. It may

not agree with the results of measurement by

commercially available color temperature meters.

The camcorder’s color temperature display should

be regarded as an approximation.

• If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,

the iris may hunt 1). To prevent this, adjust the iris

gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on the lens.

For details, refer to the lens operation manual.

1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of the image,

resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control.

If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot

be made

If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed

normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds

on the viewfinder screen.

If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the

white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs

repeatedly, contact your Sony dealer.

If you have no time to adjust the white balance

Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.

The white balance is automatically set as follows,

depending on the state of the 5600K button.

• 5600K button lit: 5600K

• 5600K button not lit: 3200K

About the white balance memory

Values stored in memory are held until the white balance

is next adjusted.

There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B,

which you can switch between with the WHITE BAL

switch (PRST/A/B).

On the WHITE SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, when WHT FILTER INH is set to OFF, there are

two memories, A and B for each position of the ND filter

of this unit (CLEAR, 1/4 ND, 1/16 ND, and 1/64 ND).

In this case, the memory is switched as you change the ND

filter position, for a total of eight (4×2) memories.

Note

Notes

Rectangle centered on

the screen. The lengths

of the sides are 70% of

the length and width of

the screen.

The white object must

be within the rectangle

and have an area of at

least 10% of the screen.

AUTO W/B BAL switch

A WB :OK

. K

Approximate color

temperature of the

subject

Error message Meaning

AWB: NG

LOW LEVEL The white video level is too low. Either

open the lens iris or increase the gain.

AWB: NG

COLOR TEMP

HIGH

The color temperature is too high.

Select a suitable setting for the 5600K

button.

AWB: NG

COLOR TEMP

LOW

The color temperature is too low. Use

the 5600K button for proper setting.

AWB: NG

TIME LIMIT Adjustment could not be completed

within the standard number of

attempts. Try to adjust again. If

adjustment fails a few times, contact

your Sony dealer.

AWB: NG

POOR WHITE

AREA

The white area could not be checked.

AWB: NG

OVER LEVEL The white video level is too high. Either

stop down the lens iris or change the

ND filter.

62 Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

If a memory error occurs

If the error message “: STORED DATA: NG” flashes on

the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the

white balance memory contents have been lost. Adjust the

white balance again. Contact your Sony dealer if this

message continues to appear even after the white balance

has been adjusted again.

Using the ATW (auto tracking white

balance) function

By using the ATW function, the white balance is adjusted

automatically when the lighting conditions change.

Depending on the shooting conditions, the white balance

may not always be correctly adjusted automatically. To get

a precise white balance, it is recommended to use the

WHITE BAL switch.

Turning the ATW function on using the WHITE

BAL switch

On the WHITE SETTING page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, set WHITE SWITCH

to ATW.

Set the WHITE BAL switch to the B(ATW) position.

This turns the ATW function on, and the white balance

is now adjusted automatically to respond to changes in

the lighting conditions.

Turning the ATW function on using an ASSIGN

switch

On the ASSIGNABLE page of the USER (or

OPERATION) menu (see page 142), set one of

ASSIGN 1 to ASSIGN 4 to ATW.

Press the ATW-assigned switch.

This turns the ATW function on, and the white balance

is now adjusted automatically to respond to changes in

the lighting conditions.

Setting the Electronic Shutter

This section describes the shutter modes that can be used

with the electronic shutter of the camcorder, and describes

the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter

mode.

About the shutter modes

The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic

shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed

below.

• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter,

the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing

shutter speed.

• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as

the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of

field.

• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury

lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but

the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing

in synchronization with the frequency of the power

supply causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under

such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color

flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power

supply frequency is 60 Hz. However, if the power

frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter speed to 1/100 can

reduce this flicker.

Note

Shutter

mode

Frame

frequency

Shutter speed Application

Standard 60i 1/100, 1/125,

1/250, 1/500,

1/1000, 1/2000

(sec.)

For shooting

fast-moving

subjects with

little blurring.

30P 1/40, 1/60, 1/120,

1/125, 1/250,

1/500, 1/1000,

1/2000 (sec.)

23.98P 1/32, 1/48, 1/96,

1/125, 1/250,

1/500, 1/1000,

1/2000 (sec.)

50i 1/60, 1/125, 1/250,

1/500, 1/1000,

1/2000 (sec.)

25P 1/33, 1/50, 1/100,

1/125, 1/250,

1/500, 1/1000,

1/2000 (sec.)

ECS

(Extended

Clear

Scan)

60i 60.0 to 6000 Hz For obtaining

images with

no horizontal

bands of

noise when

shooting

subjects such

as monitor

screens.

30P 30.0 to 7000 Hz

23.98P 24.0 to 5000 Hz

50i 50.0 to 6000 Hz

25P 25.0 to 6000 Hz

SLS

(Slow

Speed

Shutter)

(except

23.98P) 2 to 8, 16 , 32, 64

frames

(1/15 to 1/3.8,

1/1.9, 1.1, 2.1

(sec.))

For shooting

subjects in

low level

lighting

conditions.

Notes

Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

• When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in such a

manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of the

picture may have poor quality because of an inherent

characteristic of CCDs. Before using ECS mode, check

the shooting conditions.

To select the shutter mode and shutter

speed

Use the SHUTTER switch to select a shutter mode or a

standard-mode shutter speed. To set the shutter speed in

ECS or SLS mode, with the SHUTTER switch set to ON

and the ECS or SLS mode selected, use the MENU knob

for adjustment.

To set the shutter mode and the standard-mode

shutter speed

Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when

the camcorder is turned off.

Make sure that neither menu nor status display is

shown.

Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL.

The current shutter setting indication appears for about

3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment

progress message display area of the viewfinder

screen.

Examples: “: SHUTTER: 1/250”, “: ECS: 60.0 Hz”,

“: SLS: 1/30: 1FRAME”

Before the shutter setting indication in step 2

disappears, push the SHUTTER switch to SEL again.

Repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears.

To set the shutter speed in ECS mode

Carry out the steps in “To set the shutter mode and the

standard-mode shutter speed” on page 63 to set the

shutter mode to ECS.

Turn the MENU knob until the desired frequency

appears.

The selectable frequency range varies depending on

the recording format. See the table under “About the

shutter modes” on page 62.

When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is

connected

You can set the shutter speed in ECS mode with the rotary

encoder of the RM-B150.

To set the shutter speed in SLS mode

• When EZ mode is selected, SLS mode is forcibly

deselected.

• When you start recording under the following conditions

with the camcorder in SLS mode, a certain number of

black frames are recorded at the top of the recorded clip.

The number of black frames depends on the SLS setting.

- During disc playback

- During thumbnail display (page 82)

• In SLS mode, slow & quick-motion functions are not

available.

SHUTTER switch

Notes

Example display of standard mode (when the scan mode

is set to 60i)

SLS mode ECS mode

1 2

EC S: 60.00 Hz

64 Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Carry out the steps in “To set the shutter mode and the

standard-mode shutter speed” on page 63 to set the

shutter mode to SLS.

Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of

frames appears.

The number of frames can be set to values in the range

2 to 8, 16, 32, and 64 (1 frame nearly equals to 1/30

second).

Adjusting the Iris

Turning the auto iris function on and off

When the lens IRIS switch is in the A position, the auto iris

function is on; when in the M position the function is off.

When this unit is operating in EZ mode, the auto iris is

forced ON.

To set the automatic iris

The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be

changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit

subjects, or to prevent blown-out highlights.

To change the reference value

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Set A.IRIS to ON on the PAINT page of the PAINT

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select A.IRIS, and press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the reference value

from the following, and press the MENU knob.

• +0.5: about 0.5 stop further open

• +1.0: about 1 stop further open

•#0: standard value

•– 0.5: about 0.5 stop further closed

•–1.0: about 1 stop further closed

The changed reference value is retained until the

power of the camcorder is turned off. Even if the

reference value is changed, it reverts to the standard

value every time the power is turned on.

If the reference value is set to other than the ±0 value,

the following indications appear on the viewfinder

screen.

If you want to change the reference value during

shooting

You can change the reference value by MENU knob

operations only, without opening the menu.

In this case, note the following points.

Note

1 2

SLS: 1 /1 5 : 2 FR AM E

TOP P01 PAINT

A .IRIS : 0

D ETAIL L EV EL : 0

M ASTER B LC AK : 0

G AMMA SE LE CT : 0

M ASTER G AM MA : S TD

B LACK GA MM A : 0

P RESET M TX SEL : S TD

Opening the lens iris

Stopping down the lens iris

Iris opened by 1 stop

(two bars)

Iris opened by 0.5 stop

(one bar)

Iris stopped down by 1

stop (two bars)

Iris stopped down by 0.5

stop (one bar)

Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

When setting the shutter speed while the shutter mode is

set to ECS or SLS, the setting of shutter speed takes

priority (see page 63). To change the reference value,

make sure the camcorder is not in the process of setting the

shutter speed.

Check that the slow & quick-motion function is off.

Proceed as follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the CAM CONFIG page of the

MAINTENANCE menu (see page 124), and press the

MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select IRIS OVERRIDE, and press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select ON, and press the

MENU knob.

This enables the function that adjusts the reference

value during shooting. You can adjust the value by

simply turning the MENU knob.

Leaving the MENU knob in the current position for a

few seconds sets the reference value.

When the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit is

connected

The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150/B750 can be used

for lens iris setting. In this case, the bar display (s) does

not appear.

To adjust the iris sensitivity

When you use the VCL-719BXS lens (supplied with

PDW-F330K), you usually need not adjust the iris

sensitivity because lenses are equipped with iris sensitivity

adjustment function.

In auto iris mode, if hunting or response delay happens,

adjust the iris sensitivity using the iris sensitivity trimmer.

Example for the lens (VCL-719BXS) supplied with

the PDW-F330K:

You can see the iris sensitivity trimmer when removing the

rubber cap on the front of the lens driving unit. Use a mini-

screwdriver to turn the trimmer. If you turn it clockwise,

the sensitivity increases, and if you turn it

counterclockwise, the sensitivity decreases.

It is recommended that you confirm the iris sensitivity

after replacing the lens.

For more information, refer to the operating instructions

for the lens (or consult the lens maker).

Adjusting the Audio Level

Setting the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switches to

AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio

signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2.

To manually adjust the levels of the audio

inputs from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2

connectors

Proceed as follows to adjust the levels of the audio inputs

from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, which are to

be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2.

Note

Iris sensitivity trimmer (S or IRIS GAIN is indicated.)

AUTO

CH-1

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO LEVEL

0 10 0 10

CH-2

66 Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Select the audio channel that you want to record in.

For details, see “Selection of the recording audio

input” on page 49.

Set the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switch(es)

corresponding to the audio channel(s) selected in step

1 to MANUAL.

With the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control

panel and the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front,

adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB

for a normal input volume.

The input level value of the audio channel 1 is the

value of the AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 knob on the side

control panel multiplied by the value of the AUDIO

LEVEL knob on the front.

The input level value of the audio channel 2 is the

value of the AUDIO LEVEL CH-2 knob.

When the top bar (0 dB) turns on, the audio level is too

high. There is no problem if the second bar from the

top turns on.

To adjust manually the level of audio channel 1

without using the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the

front of the camcorder

Set AUDIO CH1 LEVEL to SIDE1 on the AUDIO-1 page

of the MAINTENANCE menu.

The setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front of the

camcorder is disabled.

Setting the Time Data

To set the timecode

The timecode setting range is from 00:00:00:00 to

23:59:59:29 (hours: minutes: seconds: frames).

(When the frame frequency is 23.98P: from 00:00:00:00 to

23:59:59:23)

Press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button of the LCD

monitor so that the status display appears.

Press the COUNTER/CHAPTER button of the LCD

monitor to display TCG on the time counter display

section.

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.

The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) to set

the timecode value including the last (rightmost) digit

of the timecode.

To reset the timecode value to 00:00:00:00, press the

RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor.

When the frame frequency of this unit is 23.98P, a

timecode frame count can only be set to a multiple of

4 (0, 4, 8, 12, 16, or 20).

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to the desired

operating mode for the timecode generator.

F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator keeps

running.

R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode generator runs

only while recording.

To set the DF (drop-frame)/NDF (non-drop-frame)

mode

You can select the drop-frame (DF) mode or non-drop-

frame (NDF) mode on the TIME CODE page of the

MAINTENANCE menu.

These bars turn on.

Normal input level Excessive input level

All bars turn on.

Note

PRESET F-RUN

REGEN SET

CLOCK R-RUN

SUB CLIP

CLIP MENU

SEL/SET

1 2 3

4,6

Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

When the frame frequency of this unit is 23.98P, recorded

timecode is always non-drop-frame (NDF).

To make the timecode consecutive

When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN,

recording a number of scenes to the disc normally

produces consecutive timecode. However, once you

remove the disc and record to another disc, the timecode

will no longer be contiguous even when you use again the

original disc for recording.

In this case, by setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK

switch to REGEN, the timecode can be made continuous.

To save the actual time in the timecode

Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK

saves the actual time in the timecode. When it is necessary

to set the actual time, use the TIME/DATE page of the

OPERATION menu.

For details, see “Setting the Date and Time of the Internal

Clock” on page 39.

When the frame frequency of this unit is 23.98P, the

recorded timecode does not coincide with real time.

To set the user bits

By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you

can record user information such as the date, time, or scene

number on the timecode track.

Press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button of the LCD

monitor so that the status display appears.

Press the COUNTER/CHAPTER button on the LCD

monitor to display UBG in the time counter display

section.

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.

The first (leftmost) digit flashes.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) to set

the timecode value including the last (rightmost) digit

of timecode.

Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as A to F in

capital letters.

To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00, press the

RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to the desired

operating mode for the timecode generator.

F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator keeps

running.

R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode generator runs

only while recording.

To lock the timecode to an external source

You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of

this camcorder with an external generator for the

regeneration of an external timecode. You can also

synchronize the timecode generators of other camcorders/

VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.

Input the timecode to the TC connector on the rear

connector panel, and set the IN/OUT selector switch to IN.

When using this unit as the reference device, set the IN/

OUT selector switch to OUT, to output timecode from the

TC connector.

Input the timecode to the TC IN connector on the left side.

Connections for timecode synchronization

Connect both the reference video signal and the external

timecode as illustrated below.

Example 1: Synchronizing with an external timecode

Note

PRESET F-RUN

REGEN SET

CLOCK R-RUN

SUB CLIP

CLIP MENU

SEL/SET

3,5

1 2

F330

F350

GENLOCK IN

External timecode

TC IN

Reference video signal (SD or HD)

68 Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Example 2: Connecting two units, and using one as the

reference

• When making the following connections, set the frame

frequency to the same value on both units. Wait until the

reference camcorder becomes stable (a state where a

normal picture appears on the viewfinder screen or the

LCD monitor), and then connect the other camcorders.

• When the frame frequency of this unit is 23.98P, make

sure that the reference unit is either recording or in the

recording stopped state.

To synchronize the timecode

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.

Press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button of the LCD

monitor to display TCG on the time counter display

section.

Depending on the frame frequency setting of this unit,

supply the reference timecode and reference video

signal shown in the following table to the TC IN

connector 1) and GENLOCK IN connector,

respectively. The input reference timecode and

reference video signal must meet the phase

relationship requirements of the the SMPTE timecode

standard. (Excluding the case where the frame

frequency is 23.98P.)

1) On the PDW-F350, input to the TC IN connector. On the PDW-F330,

input to the TC connector, and set the IN/OUT selector switch to IN.

a) More precisely 59.94i

b) More precisely 29.97P

c) Genlock is not possible on a 23.98PsF video signal.

This operation synchronizes the internal timecode

generator with the external timecode. After about 10

seconds, you can disconnect the external timecode

without losing the synchronization. However, there

will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or

disconnect the timecode signal during recording.

• When the frame frequency of this unit is 23.98P, a

discrepancy of ±1 frame with the externally locked

timecode may arise.

• When you finish the above procedure, the internal

timecode is immediately synchronized with the external

timecode and the time counter display will show the

value of the external timecode. However, wait for a few

seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before

recording.

• If this unit cannot be genlocked to the reference video

signal, the internal timecode is not correctly

synchronized with the external timecode.

Until this unit is genlocked to the input reference video

signal, the output video signal from this unit may break

up.

• When the internal timecode generator is set to F-RUN

mode, the precision of the synchronization may be

reduced if you turn the POWER switch off and on or

keep the camcorder turned off for a long time.

Notes

Reference camcorder

MONITOR OUT

TC OUT

GENLOCK IN

TC IN

PRESET F-RUN

REGEN SET

CLOCK R-RUN

SUB CLIP

CLIP MENU

SEL/SET

Frame

frequency of

this unit

Acceptable reference

video signal frame

frequency (HD or SD)

Acceptable

timecode

60i a), 30P b) 59.94i 30 frames

50i, 25P 50i 25 frames

23.98P 59.94i c) 24 frames

Notes

Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

About user bits settings during timecode

synchronization

When the timecode is synchronized, only the time data is

synchronized with the external timecode value. Therefore,

the user bits can have their own settings for each

camcorder.

To release the timecode synchronization

First disconnect the external timecode, then set the F-

RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.

To change the power supply from the battery

pack to an external power supply during

timecode synchronization

To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the

external power supply to the DC IN connector before

removing the battery pack. You may lose timecode

synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.

Camera synchronization during timecode

synchronization

During timecode synchronization, the camera is genlocked

to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN

connector.

Setting for Special Shooting Cases

Depending on the shooting conditions, set the camcorder

appropriately referring to the following table.

To correct skin detail

You can specify a color other than a skin tone to adjust the

color.

Set SKIN AREA IND to ON on the SKIN DETAIL

page of the PAINT menu.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Set SKIN DETECT on the SKIN DETAIL page of the

PAINT menu.

This causes the area detect cursor to be shown in the

viewfinder screen.

Place the area detect cursor on the target, then execute

SKIN DETECT.

This designates the correction area, which is indicated

by a zebra pattern.

Change the value of SKIN DTL WIDTH (0 to 359) on

the SKIN DETAIL page so that the zebra pattern may

be displayed in the target area.

Set the correction level beforehand using the SKIN

DETAIL LVL item on the SKIN DETAIL page.

When the setting is finished, set SKIN AREA IND to

OFF on the SKIN DETAIL page.

Deleting Clips

With this camcorder you can delete clips one at a time, in

sequence from the last recorded clip, or you

can delete all clips in a single operation.

You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete the selected

clip or all clips. For details, see “Deleting Clips” on

page 88.

Locked clips cannot be deleted.

To delete the last recorded clip

Proceed as follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the DISC page of the USER (or

OPERATION) menu (see page 55), and press the

MENU knob.

Select DELETE LAST CLIP, and press the MENU

knob.

The message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears.

To execute the deletion, select YES, and press the

MENU knob again.

The last recorded clip is deleted.

By repeating steps 2 and 3, you can delete any number

of clips in sequence from the last recorded clip.

Shooting

conditions

Setting and effect

When adjusting

for skin detail or

tone (Example:

When shooting

to hide skin

details)

Setting: See 5<,$8,--#8/$"=07$.#/&01:$,7$

%&'# >?.

Effect: This adjusts the skin detail or

tone to a designated active area.

The 3200K

preset white

balance makes

the picture

reddish.

Setting: Change the setting of the preset

white balance on the PRESET WHT

page of the MAINTENANCE menu.

Effect: This prevents the picture from

reddening.

Note

70 Recording – Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

To delete all clips within the disc

The following procedure deletes all unlocked clips.

Proceed as follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the DISC page of the USER (or

OPERATION) menu (see page 55), and press the

MENU knob.

Select DELETE ALL CLIPS, and press the MENU

knob.

The message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears.

To execute the deletion, select YES, and press the

MENU knob.

This deletes all clips within the disc.

Recording Shot Marks

With this unit, you can record two types of shot mark (shot

mark 1 and shot mark 2) on the disc.

Recording shot marks for scenes containing important

images and sounds enables quick access to the marked

points. This increases editing efficiency.

To specify shot marks to be recorded on

the disc

To select whether or not to record shot mark 1 and shot

mark 2, use the following procedure.

With the factory default setting, both are recorded.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, and press the MENU knob.

Select SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2, and press

the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select ON (display the shot

mark) or OFF (do not display the shot mark), and press

the MENU knob.

Recording a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark

Press the RET button on the lens once.

“ShotMark1” appears near the timecode display on the

viewfinder screen for about one second.

If SHOT MARK 1 recording has been assigned to one of

the ASSIGN switches, you can also use that switch to

record a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark.

See “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches” on

page 142 for more information about how to make

assignments.

Recording a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark

Press the RET button twice in quick succession during

recording or playback.

“ShotMark2” appears near the timecode display on the

viewfinder screen for about one second.

If SHOT MARK 2 recording has been assigned to one of

the ASSIGN switches, you can also use that switch to

record a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark.

Setting the Thumbnail Image at

Recording Time

When you record a clip, you can specify which frame to

use as the clip’s thumbnail image (page 82).

For example, if all clips have the same image in their first

frames, you can specify a frame a few seconds after the

start of the clip, so that all thumbnails will not show the

same image.

The factory default setting is to use the first frame in the

clip as the thumbnail.

Proceed as follows.

!"#$%&#%'()(*&%+,%-&(.%-,%&/(%.(,0%'*1((,2%301,%&/(%

4567%8,#9%&#%.#:(%&/(%b%.+18%&#%&/(%;('-1(;%-&(.<=

Note

Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3

Clips can be deleted in the sequence 3 t 2 t 1.

Note

SHOT MARK 1 : ON

SHOT MARK 2 : ON

INDEX PIC. POS. : 0SEC

TO P M 04 ES SE NC E MAR K

Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the

MAINTENANCE menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

>()(*&%?6@5A%B?C<%BD><E%+,;%F1(''%&/(%4567%8,#9<

3/(%b%.+18%*/+,G('%&#%+%z%.+18E%+,;%&/(%z%.+18%

*/+,G('%&#%+%H%.+18<

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time.

You can select the time in units of 1 second over the

range 0SEC to 10SEC.

Press the MENU knob.

The selection is confirmed.

You can also change the thumbnail image at playback

time. For details, see “To switch the information displayed

in the thumbnail screen” on page 83.

Recording – Advanced

Operations

Time-lapse Video Recording

(“Interval Recording” Function)

The interval recording (Interval Rec) function is effective

for shooting objects that move very slowly. As shown in

the following figure, you need to set the recording time for

one recording session (NUMBER OF FRAME) and the

total time consisting of one recording session and the

following interval (INTERVAL TIME).

A pre-lighting function is available. This function

automatically turns on the light before recording starts,

which allows you to record pictures under stable light and

color temperature conditions.

When the recording mode of this unit is set to DVCAM

format, the Interval Rec function is not available.

Making settings before shooting

To record in Interval Rec mode, you need to set the related

items beforehand as follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Set INTERVAL REC to ON on the SPECIAL

EFFECTS page of the OPERATION menu.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Note

S HOT M AR K 1 : ON

S HOT M AR K 2 : ON

I NDEX PI C. POS. : 0S EC

TO P M 04 ES SE NC E MAR K

S HOT M AR K 1 : ON

S HOT M AR K 2 : ON

I NDEX PI C. POS. :? 5S EC

TO P M 04 ES SE NC E MAR K

Note

Shooting interval (INTERVAL TIME)

Recording

time for one

recording

session

(NUMBER

OF FRAME)

72 Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

The camcorder is put in Interval Rec mode. The

TALLY indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes

(one flash/second) while the camcorder is in this

mode.

Select INTERVAL TIME, and press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to set the interval time.

You can select the value of interval time from 1SEC to

10SEC, 15SEC, 20SEC, 30SEC, 40SEC, 50SEC,

1MIN to 10MIN, 15MIN, 20MIN, 30MIN, 40MIN,

50MIN, 1H to 6H, 12H, and 24H.

Here “SEC” means seconds, “MIN” means minutes,

and “H” means hours.

Select NUMBER OF FRAME, and press the MENU

knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the length of time of

one recording session in units of frames, and press the

MENU knob.

You can select from 1F, 3F, and 6F.

Select NUMBER OF TIMES, and press the MENU

knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the number of

recording sessions, and press the MENU knob.

You can select from CONT (continuous), 50, 100,

200, 300, 500, 800, and 1000.

If you want the light to automatically turn on before

you start recording, select PRE-LIGHTING and press

the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to specify the time in units of

second (how long before the start of recording the light

should turn on automatically), and press the MENU

knob.

You can select from OFF, 2SEC, 5SEC, and 10SEC.

• Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to

turn on the light before recording.

The light switch must also be set to ON. With these

settings, the light turns on and off automatically.

However, the light remains on continuously if the

off time is less than 5 seconds.

• When the LIGHT switch is set to MAN and the light

switch is set to ON, the light remains on

continuously.

The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode whenever it is

powered off. However, the settings of INTERVAL TIME,

etc. are maintained. You do not need to set them again the

next time you use Interval Rec mode.

Shooting and recording in Interval Rec

mode

After performing the basic procedures for shooting

and recording, following the instructions in “Making

settings before shooting” on page 71, secure the

camcorder so that it will not move.

Press the REC button on the camcorder or the REC

button on the lens.

The camcorder starts recording in Interval Rec mode.

When you use the pre-lighting function, recording

starts after the light is switched on.

While recording in Interval Rec mode, the TALLY

indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/

second), and “INTERVAL” and other characters

appear on the viewfinder screen.

While recording, the REC indicator in the viewfinder

lights.

To interrupt interval recording

Press the REC button on the camcorder or the REC button

on the lens. The camcorder operates as explained below.

When the REC button is pressed during interval

recording

Recording in Interval Rec mode stops. Press the REC or

VTR button again to start recording in Interval Rec mode

again.

When the REC button is pressed during a pause

of interval recording

Recording in Interval Rec mode stops, and normal

recording starts. Press the REC button again to interrupt

recording. Press the REC button once again to start

recording in Interval Rec mode.

To end interval recording

You can exit Interval Rec mode by setting the POWER

switch to OFF or setting INTERVAL REC to OFF on the

SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the OPERATION menu.

Notes

?U 04 SP EC IA L EFF EC TS

S LOW&Q UI CK : O FF

F RAME RA TE : 3 0P

I NTERV AL R EC : ON

I NTERV AL T IME : 1S EC

N UMBER O F FRAME : 1F

N UMBER O F TIMES : CO NT

P RE-LI GH TI NG : O FF

P ICTUR E CA CHE : O FF

C ACHE RE C TIME : 8 -1 0s

Note

Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Notes on Interval Rec mode

Audio

In Interval Rec mode, audio recording is not possible.

Playback control buttons

While recording in Interval Rec mode, you cannot use the

playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, PLAY/PAUSE,

F FWD, PREV, STOP and NEXT). To use these buttons,

stop recording by pressing the REC button on the

camcorder or the REC button on the lens.

Menu operation

While recording in the Interval Rec mode, the INTERVAL

TIME and other settings cannot be changed. To change the

settings, stop recording by pressing the REC button on the

camcorder or the REC button on the lens.

Timecode

In Interval Rec mode, the internal timecode generator

operates in R-RUN mode.

Slow & Quick-motion Shooting

When the recording format is 30P or 23.98P (25P only

when PAL AREA is selected), then you can set the

shooting frame rate for recording to be different from the

playback frame rate.

This enables smooth slow motion and quick motion

effects.

• During slow & quick-motion shooting, no audio is

recorded.

• When slow & quick-motion is enabled, the interval

recording function is automatically switched off.

• The Picture Cache function is turned off automatically

whenever you turn the slow & quick motion function on.

• Switching EZ mode on disables slow & quick-motion

shooting.

• During slow & quick motion shooting, timecode is

recorded in R-RUN mode.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Check that recording is not in progress, and that the

operating mode is 30P (25P when PAL AREA is

selected) or 23.98P mode.

On the SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the OPERATION

menu, set SLOW & QUICK to ON.

For details of menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select FRAME RATE, and press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired frame rate,

and press the MENU knob.

You can select from 4P to 30P and 60P (from 4P to

25P and 50P when PAL AREA is selected).

Set the MENU switch to OFF.

The frame rate setting appears on the viewfinder

screen. Watching this display, you can use the MENU

knob to change the frame rate.

Press the REC button to start recording.

A decline in the vertical resolution of the recorded

video may be observed at 60P (50P when PAL AREA

is selected).

Selecting the frame rate in the range 31P

to 59P or 26P to 49P

On the CAM CONFIG page of the MAINTENANCE

menu, by setting SLOW MOTION to EXPAND, you can

select the frame rate in the range 31P to 59P 1) or 26P to

49P 2).

In this case, the viewfinder image or the video output from

the VIDEO OUT connector or HDSDI OUT connector

may include unnatural-looking movement, but video

recording to disc is performed properly.

1) When NTSC AREA or NTSC (J) AREA is selected

2) When PAL AREA is selected

• If you set the frame rate in the range 31P to 59P (26P to

49P when PAL AREA is selected), the viewfinder image

shows unnatural-looking movement. However, video

recording to disc is performed properly.

• A decline in the vertical resolution of the recorded video

may be observed at 31P to 59P (26P to 49P when PAL

AREA is selected).

F350

Notes

Note

Notes

?U 04 SP EC IA L EFF EC TS

S LOW&Q UI CK : O FF

F RAME RA TE : 3 0P

I NTERV AL R EC : ON

I NTERV AL T IME : 1S EC

N UMBER O F FRAME : 1F

N UMBER O F TIMES : CO NT

P RE-LI GH TI NG : O FF

P ICTUR E CA CHE : O FF

C ACHE RE C TIME : 8 -1 0s

74 Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Starting a Shoot With a Few

Seconds of Pre-Stored Picture Data

(Picture Cache Function)

The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory, in

which you can cache the last few seconds (maximum 12

seconds) of captured video and audio, so that recording

starts from a point just before you press the REC START

button or VTR button on the lens.

The Picture Cache function is enabled only with the

camcorder’s recording mode is set to MPEG HD. When

you switch to DVCAM recording mode, the Picture Cache

function is forcibly turned off and you cannot turn it on.

Setting the Picture Cache time/Picture

Cache mode

To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to turn on

Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time

(Picture Cache time) using the OPERATION menu.

The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds

recorded from the Picture Cache, counting back from the

time when you press the REC START button or the VTR

button on the lens to start recording. However, the number

of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may

be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE/

STBY switch is changed, and in the special situations

explained in the following notes.

• The contents of Picture Cache memory are unstable for

a short time immediately after you select Picture Cache

mode or change the Picture Cache time. Therefore, if

you put the unit into recording mode by pressing the

REC START button or the VTR button on the lens

immediately after such operation, pictures just before

such operation cannot be recorded.

Also, a certain amount of time is required to actually

start recording to a disc immediately after you insert a

disc and when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to

SAVE. In these cases, the number of seconds that can

actually be recorded from the Picture Cache may be

fewer than the specified Picture Cache time.

• During playback or recording review, no data is saved to

the Picture Cache memory. Thus it is not possible to use

this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material

from playback or recording review.

To turn Picture Cache mode on, proceed as follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the

OPERATION menu (see page 112), and press the

MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to

“PICTURE CACHE”.

Press the MENU knob.

The b mark on the left of “PICTURE CACHE”

changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the

setting changes to a ? mark.

Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears.

When “ON” appears, the camcorder is in Picture

Cache mode, where picture, sound, and time code are

constantly saved in memory. The TALLY indicator

(green) is on while picture data is being stored in

memory.

Press the MENU knob.

The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark

changes to a z mark.

Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “CACHE

REC TIME”.

Press the MENU knob.

The b mark on the left of “CACHE REC TIME”

changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the

setting changes to a ? mark.

Turn the MENU knob until the desired Picture Cache

time appears.

As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture Cache time

changes in the following sequence: 0-2s t 2-4s t 4-

6s t 6-8s t 8-10s t 10-12s.

Note

Notes

TO P 0 02 SP EC IA L EFF EC TS

S LOW & Q UI CK : --

F RAME RA TE : --

I NTERV AL R EC : O FF

I NTERV AL T IME : 1S EC

N UMBER O F FRAME : 1F

N UMBER O FT IMES : CO NT

P RE-LI GH TI NG : O FF

P ICTUR E CA CHE : ON

C ACHE RE C TIME : 8 -1 0S

TO P?0 02 SP EC IA L EFF EC TS

S LOW & Q UI CK : --

F RAME RA TE : --

I NTERV AL R EC : O FF

I NTERV AL T IME : 1S EC

N UMBER O F FRAME : 1F

N UMBER O FT IMES : CO NT

P RE-LI GH TI NG : O FF

P ICTUR E CA CHE : ON

C ACHE RE C TIME : 8 -1 0S

Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Press the MENU knob.

The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark

changes to a z mark.

To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF

switch to OFF.

The menu disappears, and the display indicating the

current status of the camcorder appears along the top

and bottom of the screen.

Settings made in Picture Cache mode are maintained until

changed.

You can turn Picture Cache mode on and off by assigning

the Picture Cache ON/OFF function to one of the

assignable switches (ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 ), and pressing the

switch.

For details about assignable switches, see “Assigning

Functions to ASSIGN Switches” on page 142.

• You can change the Picture Cache mode menu settings

while recording; any changes that you make, however,

do not take effect until after the recording operation is

completed.

• In Picture Cache mode, the internal time code generator

operating mode is always F-RUN regardless of the

setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch.

• The Interval Rec function is turned off automatically

whenever you turn the Picture Cache function on.

• The slow & quick Motion function is turned off

automatically whenever you turn the Picture Cache

function on.

Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode

The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode is

basically the same as that for normal recording. However,

note the following differences.

• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the picture you

are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data

stored in memory (equal to the Picture Cache time) is

recorded to disc. For this reason, disc access may

continue for a short time after you press the REC

START button to stop recording. During this time, the

playback control buttons are disabled, as in recording

mode. Also, if you press the REC START button or the

VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this

time, a separate clip is recorded.

• When you press the REC START button or the VTR

button on the lens to restart recording during disc access,

the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the

Picture Cache time, especially when there are a large

number of clips recorded on the disc. In Picture Cache

mode, you should avoid stop and start recording

operations in quick succession.

• The time disc access stops after the REC START button

is pressed equals the Picture Cache time. However, if

you start recording within the Picture Cache time

immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode,

changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback

or recording review, the picture data for the duration of

the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory.

Thus, the time disc access stops after the STOP button is

pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time.

• In Picture Cache mode, you cannot set the F-RUN/SET/

R-RUN switch to SET to make time code settings. To

make time code settings, first exit Picture Cache mode.

When power is lost during recording

• When the power is turned off during recording, the

camcorder will switch itself off after disc access has

continued for a few seconds to record the picture in the

instant of power off.

• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable, or cut

power to the AC adaptor during recording, video and

audio stored in memory will be lost without being

recorded to the disc. For this reason, make sure you do

not change the battery while recording.

Assigning User-Defined Clip Titles

Automatically

About the Automatic Title Generation

Function

By default, clips on each disc are assigned names in the

range C0001.MXF to C0300.MXF. For this reason, two

discs can contain clips with the same names. The

automatic title generation function allows you to assign

titles to all of the clips on several discs, which facilitates

clip management. For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to

TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to

C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles TITLE00021 to

TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to

C0017.MXF on disc 2.

Titles are made up of prefixes, up to 10 characters in

length, and five-digit serial numbers such as TITLE 00001.

Notes

C0020.MXF

TITLE00020

C0002.MXF

TITLE00002

TITLE00001

C0001.MXF

Clips recorded on Disc 1

76 Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Setting the title prefix

You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list

stored in internal memory, or by entering the prefix

directly.

However, to choose from a prefix list, you must create the

list beforehand on a computer and transfer it to the unit’s

internal memory with a “Memory Stick”.

Setting the initial value of the serial number

The initial value of the serial number can be set to 00001

(the default) or to any other number. The number is

automatically incremented by 1 each time you record a

clip. When it reaches 99999, it returns to 00001 for the

next clip.

Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the

serial number setting, for example if you reset the serial

number to the original value after recording several clips.

Care should be taken when setting the serial number.

To assign user-defined titles automatically

when clips are recorded

On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu, set

TITLE to ENABL.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

The following items appear.

Clip titles will be generated automatically if you record in

this state.

The title of the next clip to be recorded will be a

combination of the prefix in the PREFIX field and the

serial number in the NUMERIC field.

To use any alphanumeric character string, see the

following.

To enter a title prefix directly

Proceed as follows.

On the CLIP TITLE page, select “PREFIX” and then

press the MENU knob.

A prefix string appears.

Move the x mark to the character you want to change

and then press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to move the x mark to the

desired character in the list of selectable characters,

and then press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining characters.

When you have finished entering the prefix, turn the

MENU knob to move the x mark to END, and then

press the MENU knob.

The camcorder exits prefix input mode, and the

original CLIP TITLE page appears.

To set the initial value of the clip title serial

number

You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number

to 00001 (default) or to any 5-digit value.

To return the initial value to 00001

Proceed as follows.

On the CLIP TITLE page, select CLEAR NUMERIC

and then press the MENU knob.

The message “CLEAR OK? YES b NO” appears.

Select YES and then press the MENU knob.

The value in the NUMERIC field returns to 00001

(default).

To set the initial value to any number

Proceed as follows.

On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu,

select NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob.

A digit selection screen appears.

Note

C0017.MXF

TITLE00037

C0002.MXF

TITLE00022

TITLE00021

C0001.MXF

Clips recorded on Disc 2

23 CL IP T ITLE T OP

T ITLE : ENAB L

S ELECT P RE FIX : EXEC

C LEAR NU ME RIC : EXEC

L OAD P RE FI X DAT A: EX EC

P REFIX : TITLE

N UMERI C : 000 01

23 CL IP T ITLE TOP

T ITLE : EN ABL

S ELECT P RE FIX : E XEC

C LEAR NU ME RIC : E XEC

L OAD P RE FI X DAT A: E XEC

P REFIX : TITLE

! #$%&' () +, -.012 34 56 78 9;

= @ABCD EF GH IJKLM NO PQ RS TUV

W XYZ[] ^_ ab cdefg hi jk lm nop

q rstuv wx yz {}~

I NS DE L RE T ES C END

Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Move the x mark to the digit you want to change and

then press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to move the x mark to the

desired digit in the list of selectable digits, and then

press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining digits.

When you have finished entering the value, turn the

MENU knob to move the x mark to END, and then

press the MENU knob.

The camcorder exits numeric input mode, and the

original CLIP TITLE page appears.

To check the titles of recorded clips

Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the

thumbnail screen, and then select the clip whose title

you want to check.

The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of

the screen.

See “Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails” (page 86) for

more information about the thumbnail screen.

• It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value.

Even if you enter 00000, the value is reset to 00001

when the camcorder exits numeric input mode.

• The value of the serial number is incremented by 1

every time a title is generated. When the value

reaches 99999, the next number restarts from 00001.

• Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the

serial number after recording several clips or the

same is true depending on the value setting. Care

should be taken when setting the serial number.

Assigning User-Defined Clip and

Clip List Names

The following standard format names are assigned

automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or

recorded by XDCAM devices.

Clips: C0001 to C0300

Clip lists: E0001E01 to E0099E01

You can use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software

to assign user-defined names instead of the standard

format names 1). Assigning meaningful names to clips and

clip lists can facilitate file management. You can also use

this unit’s “AUTO TITLING” function to assign user-

defined names to clips.

1) 3/-'%-'%'0FF#1&(;%I1#.%I-1.$+1(%:(1'-#,%J<K<

To assign clip names on this unit

The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name (file

name).

Proceed as follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Set TITLE in the CLIP TITLE page of the

OPERATION menu to “ENABLE” (see page 76).

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Display the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION

menu, and then press the MENU knob.

The current setting parameters appear at the left of the

screen.

Turn the MENU knob to select “NAMING FORM”,

and then press the MENU knob.

Notes

0 05 CL IP T ITLE

0 12345 67 89

I NS DE L RE T E SC E ND

CLEAR N UM ERIC : EX EC

LOAD PR EF IX DA TA : EX EC

PREFI X : TITL E

NUMER IC : 0000 1

C0001.MXF

TITLE00001

When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “C****”

TITLE00001.MXF

TITLE00001

When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “TITLE”

TO P?0 06 FI LE N AMING

N AMING F OR M : C ** **

78 Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Turn the MENU knob to display “FREE”, and then

press the MENU knob.

You are now able to use clips and clip lists with user-

defined names.

Turn the MENU knob to select “AUTO NAMING”,

and then press the MENU knob.

C****: Assign standard format clip names

automatically.

TITLE: Assign clip titles as clip names.

Turn the MENU knob to display “TITLE”, and then

press the MENU knob.

The same name will now be given to newly recorded

clips.

When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP

TITLE menu is a space or period (.), the clip name is

the title string minus the first letter.

To enable clip and clip list renaming by FAM

Carry out steps 2 to 6 of “To assign clip names on this

unit”.

It is now possible to write, transfer, and rename clips and

clip lists with user-defined names over file access mode

(FAM) connections (see page 158).

To rename a clip, execute “Rename” on a clip with the

extension “.MXF” in the Clip folder.

The “.MXF” extension cannot be changed.

To rename a clip list, execute “Rename” on a clip list with

the extension “.SMI” in the Edit folder.

The “.SMI” extension cannot be changed.

To check clip names

Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail

screen, and select the clip whose name you want to check.

The name of the selected clip appears at the upper left of

the screen.

However, when the clip has a title, the title is displayed

instead. Titles are enclosed in double quotation marks

(“ ”).

See “Thumbnail Search” (page 82) for more information

about the thumbnail screen.

• Items in the upper left of the screen are displayed in the

following order of priority.

Title > user-assigned clip name > standard clip name

Therefore, the display changes as follows, depending on

whether a clip has a title.

- The title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit

which have titles.

- The user-assigned or standard clip name is displayed

for clips which do not have titles.

• On XDCAM devices with firmware earlier than version

1.4, clips with user defined names are displayed as

“C5000” to “C9999” in the order of recording.

• Clip names and clip list names are converted as follows

for display in the thumbnail screen and the CLIP menu.

- If the clip name is longer than 15 characters, then the

first 9 characters and the last 5 characters are

displayed. Other characters are converted into s

symbols.

- Lowercase characters are converted to uppercase.

- Kanji and other multibyte characters and some

symbols are converted into s symbols. Sequences of

s symbols are converted into a single s symbol.

The following 21 symbols can be displayed.

: . ? ! # * / ( ) + - & @ = < > % " ; _ $

Display example:

JumpingDolphin_No103

JUMPINGDO s NO103

To check clip information (name, title, etc.) by

using a menu

See “Basic Menu Operations” (page 131) for more

information about menu operations.

Note

TO P?0 06 FI LE N AMING

N AMING F OR M : FR EE

A UTO N AM IN G : T IT LE

Fuji.MXF

Clip renaming by FAM is enabled

Notes

Sakura.SMI

Clip list renaming by FAM is enabled

Recording – Advanced Operations

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Display the CLIP STATUS page of the DIAGNOSIS

menu, and then press the MENU knob.

The current settings for each item are displayed on the

right side.

To create a list of title prefix strings

Prepare the data beforehand according to the following

rules.

File name

Assign the name “TITLES.TXT” to the file.

Input format

Enter title prefixes one at time, separated by newline

(CRLF) characters.

Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long. A prefix file can

contain up to 20 prefixes.

Allowable characters

• Digits: 0 to 9

• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z

• The following symbols: ! , #, $, %, &, ', ( , ) , ~, =, -, ^,

@, [, ], {, }, +, ; (semicolon), , (comma), . (period), _

(underscore)

• Space

Title prefix list example

Tennis<CRLF>

Basketball<CRLF>

Skiing_1<CRLF>

Skiing_2<CRLF>

To transfer a title prefix list to the unit’s

internal memory

Proceed as follows.

Copy the title prefix file (TITLES.TXT) to the

following folder on the “Memory Stick”.

\\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\GENERAL\VAL_LIST

This folder is created when you insert a “Memory

Stick” into the camcorder. Do not create this folder

yourself on a computer.

Insert a “Memory Stick” with the title prefix file

(TITLES.TXT) into the “Memory Stick” slot of the

camcorder.

On the CLIP TITLE page, select LOAD PREFIX

DATA and then press the MENU knob.

“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears, and the file

on the “Memory Stick” (TITLES.TXT) is transferred

to the internal memory of the unit.

The message “COMPLETE!” appears when the

transfer finishes.

The message “FILE NOT FOUND!” appears if no list

of title prefixes is found.

Check the location where the file is stored on the

“Memory Stick”.

To select a prefix from the title prefix list

Proceed as follows.

On the CLIP TITLE page, select SELECT PREFIX

and then press the MENU knob.

A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears.

When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to

the internal memory of this unit, only the initial value

“TITLE” appears.

Select the desired title prefix from the list, and then

press the MENU knob.

The CLIP TITLE page appears again, and the selected

prefix appears in the PREFIX field.

Viewing Camera Video During

Playback (Live & Play Function)

By carrying out the following procedure before starting

playback, you can view camera video (live video) during

playback from the disc. This is a convenient way to frame

the next shot and adjust the exposure and focus while

viewing recorded video and playback video.

Note

TO P D 03 CL IP S TATUS

C LIP N O : 0 01 /0 10

N AME : C 00 01

T ITLE: ( no n am e)

R ECORD D EV ICE: PD W- F3 50

SE RI AL : 1 00 01

DA TE : 08 /0 1/ 06

TI ME : 15 :0 0: 05

Note

F350

? P00 T IT LE PREF IX E SC

0 01: T en ni s

0 02: B as ke tball

0 03: S ki in g_1

0 04: S ki in g_2

0 05: A th le tics

0 06: A qu at ics

0 07: C yc li ng

0 08: S of tb all

0 09: F en ci ng

0 10: S ai li ng

80 Playback

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

The FREEZE MIX function (see page 143) cannot be used

when the LIVE & PLAY function is on.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Set LIVE & PLAY to ON on the OUTPUT page of the

OPERATION menu.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the video signal output conditions from the

following modes.

OFF: Do not output camera video signals during disc

playback (output playback signals on the

viewfinder and LCD monitor, and from all video

connectors).

HDSDI: Select this mode when you want to switch the

output from the HDSDI OUT connector between

camera video and disc playback video (the output

from the VIDEO OUT connector and on the

viewfinder and LCD monitor is fixed as the

camera output).

VBS: Select this mode when you want to switch the

output from the VIDEO OUT connector between

camera video and disc playback video (the output

from the HDSDI connector is fixed as the camera

output).

When you select VBS, you will need an external

monitor with a HDSDI input connector to check the

camera video during playback.

On how to connect an external video monitor, see

“Connecting an External Video Monitor” on page 51.

Playback

Disc playback start position

Although this unit uses optical discs, it is designed to offer

the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs.

One of these is the playback start position, which works in

the same way as with tape, as described below.

After playback stop

The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was

pressed.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the

stop position.

After recording

The unit stops at the position where recording ended.

To play back a clip, press the PREV button to move to the

start frame of any clip, or press the PREV button with the

PLAY/PAUSE button held down to move to any position.

After disc insertion

The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most

recently ejected.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the

most recent position.

The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is

ejected, which allows playback to start at that position

whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player.

The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc

is set to REC INH.

Normal Playback

By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can review any

length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and

white or in color on the LCD monitor. There are two other

ways to review the recording.

• Recording review: You can view the last two seconds of

the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and

white or in color on the LCD monitor.

• Using an external color video monitor: You can see the

recording in color on a color video monitor without the

need for any external adaptor.

You may also view the picture during a fast forward or fast

reverse search.

See “Side control panel (inside the protection cover)” on

page 20 for details about the switches and controls used to

select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level.

Note

Playback

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Deteriorating playback conditions

Deteriorating playback may be due to the following

causes.

• Scratches and dust on the disc surface

This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar from

cigarette smoke, and so on.

Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are

not a problem because they are registered in advance as

defects, and recording avoids them. However, scratches

and soiling which occur after recording can lead to

deteriorating playback conditions.

• Aging of disc recording layers

Over several decades, the recording layers of optical

discs can age and cause deteriorating playback

conditions.

• Deteriorating laser diodes performance

The performance of the laser diodes used in optical

heads can worsen with age, leading to deteriorating

playback conditions.

Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate

guide to when it is time to replace optical heads.

To prevent playback conditions from

deteriorating

Pay attention to the following points when handling discs.

• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with

your hands.

• Do not store for long periods in locations which are

dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.

• Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or

in locations exposed to direct sunlight.

If playback conditions have deteriorated

Read errors occur when playback conditions continue to

deteriorate.

When a read error occurs, the message “DISC DEFECT”

appears, the video freezes, and the audio output is

suppressed.

If this happens, check the following points.

Whether the disc displays the same playback condition

on other XDCAM devices: If so, the surface of the

disc may be dirty or scratched, or the performance of

the recording layers on the disc may have worsened

due to age. Do not use discs with these symptoms.

Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device

displays the same playback conditions: If so, the

performance of the laser diodes may have

deteriorated. Check the total optical output time.

Freezing a Picture During Playback

Proceed as follows.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start playback.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at the instant

when you want to freeze the picture.

A frozen picture appears.

The time code is displayed in the time counter display

section and the PLAY/PAUSE indicator changes from

constant lighting to flashing (one flash/second).

To restart playback, press the PLAY/PAUSE button

once again.

When remotely controlling the camcorder from

an RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit

You can perform the same operation from the RM-B150/

B750.

Checking the Last Two Seconds of

the Recording (a Recording Review

Operation)

If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is

paused, the last two seconds of the recording is played

back on the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor. Use

this function to check whether recording went smoothly. If

you hold down the RET button on the lens, playback

begins from the beginning of the clip. When you release

the RET button, the reverse search stops and playback in

the forward direction begins. After playback, the

camcorder is ready to start recording again.

By assigning the the same function as that of the RET

button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switch, you can

use the switch in the same way as the lens RET button.

Checking the Recording on a Color

Video Monitor

Connect a color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT or

HDSDI OUT connector of the camcorder. By pressing the

PLAY/PAUSE button, you can view the recorded picture.

On how to connect a color video monitor, see “Connecting

an External Video Monitor” on page 51.

82 Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Thumbnail Search

Searching Using Thumbnails

To display the thumbnail images of all clips on the disc,

and cue up a desired clip, proceed as follows.

With the SUB CLIP indicator off, press the

THUMBNAIL button to turn the THUMBNAIL

indicator on.

If the SUB CLIP indicator is lit, you can turn it off by

pressing the SEL/SET button to the upper side (the

SUB CLIP side) with the SHIFT button held down.

If the menu screen is displayed, move the MENU

switch to the OFF position and press the

THUMBNAIL button.

If you set the MENU switch to ON while thumbnails

are displayed, thumbnail display is replaced with

menu display.

The thumbnails of all clips on the disc appear.

(In the following descriptions, this is referred to as the

“thumbnail screen”.)

a) When a title has been assigned to a clip (see page 75), the title is

enclosed in double quotation marks, for example “TITLE00001”.

b) A mark is shown to indicate that the thumbnail (index picture) is not

the first frame of the clip. (See “Changing the Thumbnail Image

(Index Frame) of a Clip” on page 83.)

c) You can select the information to be displayed (see page 83). The

factory default setting is display of timecode.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) or

MENU knob to select the desired clip.

You can also select clips by the following operations.

Press the PREV or NEXT button: Move to the

previous or next clip.

Press the PREV or NEXT button with the F REV

or F FWD button held down: Move to the first

or last clip.

Press the F REV/F FWD button: Move to the

previous or next page.

To cue up the selected clip, press the SEL/SET button

or the MENU knob.

To start playback from the selected clip, press the

PLAY/PAUSE button.

The remainder of the thumbnail selection process is the

same as in steps 2 and 3 above.

To return to the previous screen

Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning the

THUMBNAIL indicator off. At any point in the procedure

you can return to the previous screen with this operation.

The factory default setting is to use the first frame of a clip

as its thumbnail image. At recording time, you can change

this to another frame within 10 frames of the start of the

clip (page 70). You can also change it to any frame at

playback time (page 83). However, the thumbnail search

CH-1

MIX

CH-2

CH-3

PRESET

AUTO

FRONT

WIRELESS

REAR

CH-1

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO IN

F-RUN

REGEN

OFF

SET

OFF

CLOCK

R-RUN

MONITOR

FRONT MIC

LOW CUT VIDEO OUT

CHARACTER

AUDIO LEVEL

THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP

MIX

CH-4

CH-1/2

CH-3/4

SHIFT CLIP MENU

SEL/SET 0 10 0 10

ESSENCE

MARK

CH-2

CH-3

CH-4

LITHIUM BATT

2,3

THUMBNAIL

indicator

SUB CLIP indicator

SHIFT

button

Note

Sixth clip is selected

from a total of 34 clips.

Recording date and time

of selected clip Duration of selected clip

Name of currently

selected clip a)

Thumbnail of currently

selected clip (first frame

or specified b) frame)

Clip information C)

Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

function always cues up the first frame in a clip, even if the

thumbnail image has been changed.

To switch the information displayed

in the thumbnail screen

You can switch the clip information displayed at the

bottom of thumbnails. You can also switch the display of

thumbnail sequence numbers.

The factory default setting is “TIME CODE”.

Proceed as follows.

With the thumbnail screen displayed, hold down the

SHIFT button and press the SEL/SET button to the

bottom side (the CLIP MENU side).

The CLIP menu appears.

See page 100 for more information about the CLIP

menu.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“CLIP INFORMATION”, and then press the button or

knob.

A sub menu appears.

Use the SEL/SET button or the MENU knob to select

the information to display from among the following,

and then press the button or knob.

•DATE: Date of recording

•TIME CODE: Start timecode

•DURATION: Whole length of clip

•SEQUENCE NUMBER: Thumbnail sequence

number

The information displayed on the lower side of

thumbnails changes according to the item selected.

Example: When “SEQUENCE NUMBER” is selected

Some characters in clip names, clip list names, and titles

may be converted to “s” characters for display in the

thumbnail screen and CLIP menu. For details, see page 78.

Changing the Thumbnail Image

(Index Frame) of a Clip

In the thumbnail screen, normally the first frame of a clip

is displayed as the index frame.

To change this to show a different frame, proceed as

follows.

You can also select (at 1-second intervals) a frame within

10 seconds of the first frame as the thumbnail image of the

clip at the time when you record a clip with this unit. For

details, see page 70.

With the thumbnail screen displayed, hold down the

SHIFT button and press the SEL/SET button to the

bottom side (the CLIP MENU side).

The CLIP menu appears (see page 100).

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“SET INDEX PICTURE”, and then press the button/

konb.

This switches to the screen for selecting a clip for

changing the index frame.

Select the desired thumbnail, and press the SEL/SET

button or MENU knob.

The frame from the clip that is currently specified as

the thumbnail is displayed. In this state, you can use

playback or search.

Note

Thumbnail sequence number

84 Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

Using playback or search, find the new index frame.

You can also turn the MENU knob for a jog operation.

Press the SEL/SET button or MENU knob.

This sets the selected scene as the index frame, and

returns to the thumbnail screen.

When the thumbnail is other than the first frame, this

is shown as follows.

If you select a marked thumbnail, and press the SEL/SET

button or MENU knob, this does not cue up to the

thumbnail position. Cuing up is always to the first frame of

the clip.

To cancel setting the index frame, hold down the SHIFT

button and press the SEL/SET button down (CLIP

MENU).

Cuing Up a Frame by Searching for

an Essence Mark

Proceed as follows.

With the SUB CLIP indicator off, hold down the

SHIFT button and press the THUMBNAIL button.

The essence mark selection screen appears.

Essence marks not recorded on the disc appear in gray.

To escape from the essence mark selection screen to

the previous screen

Press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD

monitor.

Use the SEL/SET button or the MENU knob to select

the desired essence mark.

Press the SEL/SET button or the MENU knob.

Thumbnails of the frames including the selected

essence mark appear.

Note

Mark indicating that the

thumbnail is not the first frame

CH-1

MIX

CH-2

CH-3

PRESET

AUTO

FRONT

WIRELESS

REAR

CH-1

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO IN

F-RUN

REGEN

OFF

SET

OFF

CLOCK

R-RUN

MONITOR

FRONT MIC

LOW CUT VIDEO OUT

CHARACTER

AUDIO LEVEL

THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP

MIX

CH-4

CH-1/2

CH-3/4

SHIFT CLIP MENU

SEL/SET 0 10 0 10

ESSENCE

MARK

CH-2

CH-3

CH-4

LITHIUM BATT

2-5

Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

(The example shows the case where SHOT MARK1 is

selected as the essence mark.)

Searching Using the Chapter

Function

A thumbnail display shows the SHOT MARK 1 and

SHOT MARK 2 recorded within the specified clip as

chapter titles.

With the THUMBNAIL indicator and SUB CLIP

indicator off, press the THUMBNAIL button.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) or

MENU knob to select the desired clip.

An “S” mark appears at the upper right of the

thumbnails of clips that have short marks set.

Press the COUNTER/CHAPTER button on the right

side of the LCD monitor.

A chapter screen is displayed.

The essence marks (REC START, SHOT MARK 1,

SHOT MARK 2) recorded within the clip appear as

thumbnails.

The “S1” and “S2” marks displayed on thumbnails

indicate frames where SHOT MARK1 and SHOT

MARK2 are set.

Thumbnails without one of these marks are frames

where REC START essence marks are set.

For details of chapter settings, see “Recording Shot

Marks” (page 70).

Deleting shot marks

You can delete a specified clip shot mark.

• Only SHOT MARK 1 and SHOT MARK 2 can be

deleted. REC START cannot be deleted.

• Shot mark deletion is only possible when the settings are

such that shot mark recording is possible.

• Essence marks cannot be deleted when the clip is locked

(page 87).

In the chapter screen, hold down the SHIFT button and

press the SEL/SET button down (CLIP MENU).

The CLIP menu appears (see page 100).

Select DELETE SHOT MARK.

Select the clip (SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2).

By holding down the SHIFT button and turning the

MENU knob, you can select more than one chapter.

Press the SEL/SET button or MENU knob.

A confirmation message appears.

Select “OK” and then press the SEL/SET button or

MENU knob.

This deletes the specified shot mark.

Searching Using the Expand

Function

Using the expand function, you can divide the duration of

a selected clip on the thumbnail screen into 12 segments,

Sixth frame is selected

from a total of 36 SHOT

MARK 1.

Recording date and time of the clip

that contains the selected frame

Currently selected

SHOT MARK 1 frame

This indicates that the thumbnail

images are the frames including the

essence mark (SHOT MARK 1).

Frame information (date and time of

creation, timecode, recording time)

Time from the

selected short mark to

the next shot mark

“S” mark

Notes

86 Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

and display a new thumbnail screen showing the first

frame in each segment. This function allows rapid

searching of the scenes within a particular clip. The expand

function can be applied up to three times (12 divisions, 144

divisions, and 1728 divisions).

The maximum number of blocks may be larger than 1728

when the recorded duration of the clip is short. In this case,

the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1

frame. This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at

equal intervals.

With the THUMBNAIL indicator and SUB CLIP

indicator off, press the THUMBNAIL button.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) or

MENU knob to select the desired clip.

Press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button on the right side

of the LCD monitor.

Thumbnails appear for twelve equal divisions of the

clip.

To change the expansion ratio

Each time you press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button

changes the ratio in the sequence ×12 $%×144 $ ×1728.

To change the ratio in the reverse sequence, hold down the

SHIFT button and press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button.

Alternatively, press the RESET button on the right side of

the LCD monitor to return to the previous screen.

Clip List Playback

You can play back clips in their order in a clip list created

with the scene selection function (see Chapter 4).

Playing back in clip list order

Proceed as follows.

If the clip list that you want to play exists on the disc,

load it into the current clip list (see page 92).

For the clip list loading operation, see “Loading a

Clip List From the Disc as the Current Clip List” on

page 101.

With the THUMBNAIL indicator off, hold down the

SHIFT button and press the SEL/SET button up (SUB

CLIP).

The SUB CLIP indicator lights.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Playback begins from the first sub clip in the current

clip list.

To return from clip list playback mode to

normal playback mode

With Clip list playback stopped, hold down the SHIFT

button and press the SET/SEL to the top side (the SUB

CLIP side).

Depending on the length of sub clips in the clip list and

their arrangement on the disc, playback may freeze

momentarily between sub clips.

Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails

With the desired clip list loaded in the current clip list,

proceed as follows.

Press the THUMBNAIL button, lighting the

THUMBNAIL indicator.

Hold down the SHIFT button, and press the SEL/SET

button up (SUB CLIP).

The clip list display appears.

See page 93 for more information about the clip list

screen.

Note

Displays the number

of clip divisions

Note

Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

a) If the clip list has a title (page 75), the title is displayed enclosed in

double quotation marks, for example “TITLE00001”.

To escape from the clip list display to the whole-

screen display

Press the THUMBNAIL button to turn the

THUMBNAIL indicator off.

This returns to the clip list playback state.

Stop the unit before using the SUB CLIP button. Press

the STOP button if the message “STOP ONCE!”

appears.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select the

sub clip you want to cue up.

To cue up the selected clip, press the SEL/SET button

or MENU knob. To start playback from the selected

clip, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The clip list thumbnail screen always shows the first

frame (In point) of each sub clip.

Locking (Write-protecting) Clips

In the thumbnail screen, you can lock them so that they

cannot be deleted or altered.

Locking prevents the following operations on clips.

• Deletion

• Renaming by FAM or FTP

• Changing the thumbnail image (index picture)

• Adding and deleting shot marks

• Locked clips are deleted along with other clips.

• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write

Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled

position.

With the SUB CLIP indicator off, press the

THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.

The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.

Select the clip to lock (you can do this with the same

operations as step 2 of “Searching Using Thumbnails”

(page 82).

Hold down the SHIFT button and press the CLIP

MENU button.

Then CLIP menu appears.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“LOCK/UNLOCK CLIP”, and then press the button

or knob.

A lock confirmation screen appears. This screen

displays clip names and clip titles.

To cancel the lock operation and return to the

thumbnail screen

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“CANCEL”, and then press the button or knob.

Alternatively, press the RESET button on the right

side of the LCD monitor.

Note

Sixth frame is selected

from a total of 34 sub clips.

Recording date and time

of selected sub clip

!"#$%&'($')*+,-./'+)$01./2$.)1$

/'-2$+*$%,2./'+)3$')'/'.&$/'-2%+123$

(&.4#.%5$/'-26

Name of loaded clip list a)

Total playback time of

sub clips in a clip list

Currently selected

sub clip

Notes

Clip to be locked

88 Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

With OK selected, press the SEL/SET button or

MENU knob.

You return to the thumbnail screen, and a lock icon

appears on the thumbnail of the selected clip to show

that it is locked.

You cannot delete locked clips, rename them, set their

thumbnails, and so on. Unlock the clip if you want to

perform any of these operations.

To lock clips with a shortcut operation

After carrying out step 2 in the procedure, press the STOP

button with the SHIFT button held down (shortcut

operation).

To unlock clips

Carry out step 2 of “Locking clips” to select a locked clip

(one with the lock icon displayed on its thumbnail). Then

do one of the following.

• Carry out steps 3 and 4 of “Locking Clips.”

• Press the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down

(shortcut operation).

To lock all clips

Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Locking Clips” to display

the CLIP MENU.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and then press

the button. or knob.

A submenu screen appears.

Select “LOCK ALL CLIPS”, and then press the SEL/

SET button or MENU knob.

A confirmation screen appears.

With “OK” selected, press the SEL/SET button or

MENU knob.

All clips are locked.

To unlock all clips

Carry out the procedure in “To lock all clips”, selecting

UNLOCK ALL CLIPS in step 2.

Deleting Clips

You can delete clips while checking their contents.

• Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the

disc is set to the recording disabled position.

• If the deletion target clip is referenced by clip lists on the

disc, all of those clip lists are deleted as well.

• If the deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip

list, all of the referenced sub clips, and only those sub

clips, are deleted at the same time as the deletion target

clip.

• You can use the DISC MENU to delete the last clip or all

clips. For details, see page 69.

With the SUB CLIP indicator off, press the

THUMBNAIL button, turning it on.

The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.

Select the clip to delete (you can do this with the same

operations as step 2 of “Searching Using Thumbnails”

(page 82).

Press the CLIP MENU button with the SHIFT button

held down.

The CLIP menu appears (see page 100).

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“DELETE CLIP”, and then press the button. or knob.

A deletion confirmation screen appears and then

thumbnails of four frames (the first frame,

intermediate frame 1, intermediate frame 2, and the

last frame) in the target clip appear. At the same time,

the clip name, title, date and time of creation, and

duration appear.

One of the following messages appears, depending on

whether the target clip is referenced in a clip list.

• When the target clip is not referenced in a clip list:

“DELETE CLIP?”

• When the target clip is referenced in a clip list:

“DELETE CLIP & CLIP LIST?” (All clip lists that

reference the deletion target clip will be deleted as

well).

Lock icon

Notes

Clip to be deleted

Thumbnail Search

Chapter 3 Recording and Playback

To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail

screen

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“CANCEL”, and then press the button or knob.

Alternatively, press the RESET button on the right

side of the LCD monitor.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“OK”, and then press the button or knob.

The clip is deleted and you return to the thumbnail

screen.

To delete clips with a simple operation

You can delete clips without displaying the CLIP menu.

After step 2, press the RESET button on the right side of

the LCD monitor with the SHIFT button held down

(shortcut operation).

The clip deletion screen appears directly, without

displaying the CLIP MENU.

To delete all clips

Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Locking Clips” to display

the CLIP MENU.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and then press

the button or knob.

A sub menu appears.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and then press the button or

knob.

A deletion confirmation screen appears.

To execute the deletion, use the SEL/SET button or

MENU knob to select “OK”, and then press the button

or knob.

All clips are deleted.

• Locked clips cannot be deleted.

• When all clips have been deleted, you return to the

normal screen.

Notes

Chapter4

90 Overview

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Scene Selection

Overview

What is scene selection?

Scene selection is a function which allows you to select

material (clips) from the material recorded on a disc and

perform cut editing. You can do this by operating on this

unit only.

• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut

editing in the field and in other offline situations.

• In scene selection you create a clip list (editing data).

Since the material itself is not affected, you can repeat

this any number of times.

• You can play back the edit list created by scene selection

on this unit.

• In the scene selection function, you can add whole clips,

add parts of a clip, add using chapters, change the

playback sequence, amend or delete In and Out points,

and carry out all of these operations simply on this unit.

• Clip lists (edit data) created with the scene selection

function can be used on XPRI and other full-feature

nonlinear editing systems.

Overview

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Flow of scene selection editing

Record material or insert disc containing recorded

material into this unit

PDW-F330/F330P/F350/F350P

To edit a clip list on the disc

Load clip lists (see page 101)

• Including sub clips in the current clip list !"##$%&'# ?@*

• Reordering sub clips !"##$%&'# ?A*

• Adjusting the sub clip In/Out points (trimming)

!"##$%&'# ?A*

• Deleting sub clips !"##$%&'# ?B*

Create and edit a clip list

Save the clip list to disc (see page 98)

Select clipsRecorded material Clip list 1

Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4

Sub clip 1

Sub clip 2

Sub clip 3

Disc

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip list 1

Play back the clip list (see page 86)

Sub clip 1

Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3

Play back clip list

PDW-F330/F330P/F350/F350P

92 Overview

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Clip

Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called

“clips”. A clip contains the material between a recording

start point and a recording end point.

Clips have numbers beginning with C, for example C0001.

Instead of using clip numbers, you can manage clips by

assigning clip titles or names. !"#$%&'()*+,$+&&$-(.&+$/0$

(1%$//2

Clip list

You can use the scene selection function to select desired

clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list

called a “clip list”.

Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for example

E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc.

Sub clips (clips in clip lists)

The specified clips (or parts of clips) in a clip list are called

“sub clips”. Sub clips are virtual edit lists specifying

ranges in the original clips. Clip data in the original clips is

not overwritten.

The following figure illustrates the relation between clips

and sub clips.

Clip list editing (current clip list)

To edit a clip list, you need to load the clip list from the

disc into the internal unit memory.

The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory

is called the “current clip list”.

The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation

and editing. Clip list playback also uses the current clip

list.

After creating and editing a clip list, you need to save it to

disc.

Clip list playback

Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.

Clips are played back according to clip list data.

Recording

start point of

clip 2 Recording end

point of clip 2

r r

Clip 1

(C0001) Clip 2

(C0002) Clip 3

(C0003) Clip 4

(C0004)

Clip number

Clip list number

Thumbnails of selected clip list

Unit memory

Current clip list

Can be edited (adding, deleting, and

reordering sub clips) t

Clip list playback

and thumbnail

display

SAVE Mm LOAD

Disc

C0001 (Clip 1)

C0002 (Clip 2)

C0003 (Clip 3)

•

E0001 (Clip list 1)

E0002 (Clip list 2)

E0003 (Clip list 3)

•

E0099 (Clip list 99)

Clip 1

(C0001) Clip 2

(C0002) Clip 3

(C0003) Clip 4

(C0004)

Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3

Clip list (E0001)

Clips on the disc

In the above example, the whole of clip 2 has been added as sub

clip 1, and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub clip 2. Sub

clip 3 is part of clip 3. Therefore, when clip list E0001 is played

back, clip 4 is played after clip 2, and then the part of clip 3 shown

in gray color is played.

Creating Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Creating Clip Lists

Including Sub Clips in the Current

Clip List

Select the desired clip in the thumbnail screen, to include

it in the clip list as a sub clip.

The CLIP menu handles up to 99 clip lists.

Including a clip selected in the thumbnail

screen in the clip list

Proceed as follows.

With the SUB CLIP indicator off, press the

THUMBNAIL button to turn the THUMBNAIL

indicator on.

If the menu screen is displayed, move the MENU

switch to the OFF position and press the

THUMBNAIL button.

If you move the MENU switch to ON while

thumbnails are displayed, the thumbnail display

disappears, and the menu appears.

The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.

(In the following description, this is referred to as the

“thumbnail screen”. )

Hold down the SHIFT button, and press the SEL/SET

button up (SUB CLIP).

The “LOAD CLIP LIST” screen of the CLIP menu

appears.

For an already created clip list, the details including

the creation date appear, and for an empty clip list,

“NEW FILE” appears.

(If a clip list is already loaded, the LOAD CLIP LIST

screen does not appear. In this case proceed to step 4.)

To switch the information displayed in clip

lists

Press the SEL/SET button to the right side.

Each press of the button switches the information

displayed in the following order.

Date and time of creation t title t clip name t ....

The following information is displayed for each type.

+DATE: Date and time of clip list creation or last

modification

+TITLE: The title of the clip list, if it has one

Note

CH-1

MIX

CH-2

CH-3

PRESET

AUTO

FRONT

WIRELESS

REAR

CH-1

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO IN

F-RUN

REGEN

OFF

SET

OFF

CLOCK

R-RUN

MONITOR

FRONT MIC

LOW CUT VIDEO OUT

CHARACTER

AUDIO LEVEL

THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP

MIX

CH-4

CH-1/2

CH-3/4

SHIFT CLIP MENU

SEL/SET 0 10 0 10

ESSENCE

MARK

CH-2

CH-3

CH-4

LITHIUM BATT

2-9

3,5-8

SUB CLIP indicator

THUMBNAIL indicator

Displays the type of

the information Switch the displayed information

by pressing the SEL/SET button

to the right side

94 Creating Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

+NAME: The standard or user-defined name of the

clip list

You can also use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing

Software to set clip list titles.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select a

clip list number (E0001 and so on), and press the

button/knob.

L#0%*+,%+)'#%.#:(%&/(%*01'#1%$-&/%&/(%BM5N%+,;%

65A3%90&&#,'<%

O/(,%P#0%/+:(%+%)+1G(%,0.9(1%#I%*)-F%)-'&'E%P#0%*+,%

0'(%&/(%I#))#$-,G%#F(1+&-#,'%&#%.#:(%&/(%*01'#1%*)#'(1%

&#%&/(%*)-F%)-'&%&/+&%P#0%$+,&<

With the SHIFT button held down, press the PREV

or NEXT button: Move to the first or last clip

list.

Press the F REV or F FWD button: Move to

previous or next page.

If you select a clip list number with a NEW FILE flag,

an empty clip list is displayed as shown in the

following figure.

Hold down the SHIFT button, and press the SEL/SET

button down (CLIP MENU).

The CLIP menu appears.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“ADD”, then press the button/knob.

A screen as shown below appears.

(In the following description, this whole screen is

referred to as the “scene selection screen”.)

To return to the CLIP menu

Press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD

monitor.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) or

MENU knob to select the clip you want to include in

the clip list, press the button/knob.

To make a multiple selection, hold down the SHIFT

button, and turn the MENU knob.

An I-bar cursor appears in a window in the lower part

of the screen to show the insertion position.

If you press the RESET button at this point, you return

to the state at the beginning of step 6.

Press the SEL/SET button or MENU knob.

The clip selected in the upper part is added to the

current clip list in the lower part, as a sub clip.

The screen returns to the CLIP menu (see step 4).

To continue working without returning to the

CLIP menu

With the SHIFT button held down, press the SEL/SET

button or the MENU knob.

You return directly to the scene selection screen of

step 5.

Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all desired clips have been

added to the current clip list.

You can add the same clip as a sub clip any number of

times.

Creating Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Add all the desired clips to the current clip list, and

press the RESET button on the right of the LCD

monitor.

You return to the clip list screen, which displays

thumbnails of the newly added clips (added as sub

clips).

Save the contents of the current clip list on the disc.

See “Saving the Current Clip List to Disc” on page 98.

• If the contents of the current clip list is not saved to

disc, then ejecting the disc, or powering off will

destroy the data. After creating a clip list, be sure to

save it to disc.

• An asterisk (*) appears after the date and time of

creation when a clip list has not been saved to disc.

• Even when clips whose thumbnail image (index

frame) is not the first frame are added to a clip list, it

is always the first frame that is displayed on the clip

list screen.

Adding Sub Clips Using the Expand

Function

You can use the expand function (see page 85) to divide a

sub clip and display thumbnails of the divisions. This

allows you to include a section of the sub clip.

Proceed as follows.

In the upper part of the scene selection screen, select

the sub clip for expanded display.

Press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button on the right of

the LCD monitor.

The upper part of the screen shows thumbnails for the

clip in eight divisions.

To vary the expansion ratio

Each time you press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button

changes the ratio through the sequence ×8 t ×64 t

×512.

Notes

Total duration of sub clips in the current clip list

I-bar cursor (shows insertion

position of next sub clip)

Thumbnails of the sub clips already added to the current clip list

Asterisk appears when clip list has not

been saved to disc.

Mark indicating that the thumbnail is not the first frame

96 Creating Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

To return to the previous setting, hold down the SHIFT

button and press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button to

step back one level.

The maximum number of divisions may be 512 or

greater when you expand clips with short recording

times. In this case, the interval between the expanded

thumbnail frames is fixed at 1 frame, which allows you

to view expanded thumbnails at a constant interval.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select the

thumbnail for the part you want to include in the clip

list. To select two or more thumbnails, hold down the

SHIFT button and operate the MENU knob.

Even if more than one thumbnail is selected, the

addition to the current clip list is linked to a single sub

clip.

Press the SEL/SET button or MENU knob.

The clip selected in the upper part is added to the

current clip list in the lower part, as a sub clip.

The section from the selected thumbnail to the next

thumbnail is included as a sub clip.

Adding Sub Clips Using the Chapter

Function

You can use the chapter function (see page 85) to display

thumbnails of shot marks in clips on the disc, and include

sections of those clips in clip lists.

Proceed as follows.

In the scene selection screen, select the clip for chapter

display.

An “S” mark appears in the upper right of clips where

shot marks are set.

Press the COUNTER/CHAPTER button on the right

of the LCD monitor.

Thumbnails of the chapters in the specified clip appear

in the upper part of the scene selection screen.

Using the SEL/SET button or MENU knob, from the

positions of the essence marks recorded within this

clip, select the chapter for the part you want to include

in the clip list. To select two or more chapters, hold

down the SHIFT button and operate the MENU knob.

The section from the selected thumbnail to the next

thumbnail is included as a sub clip.

Even if more than one chapter is selected, the addition

to the current clip list is linked to a single sub clip.

Press the SEL/SET button or MENU knob.

The clip selected in the upper part is added to the

current clip list in the lower part, as a sub clip.

Note

Editing Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Editing Clip Lists

Reordering Sub Clips

Proceed as follows.

In the clip list screen, hold down the SHIFT button,

and press the SEL/SET button down (CLIP MENU).

The CLIP menu appears.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“MOVE”, and press the button/knob.

This shifts to the MOVE screen.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) or

MENU knob to select the sub clip that you want to

move, and then press the button or knob.

To make a multiple selection, hold down the SHIFT

button, and turn the MENU knob.

An I-bar cursor appears, indicating the movement

destination.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to move the

I-bar cursor to the position to which you want to move,

and press the button/knob.

This changes the sequence of sub clips.

To continue moving sub clips

If you hold the SHIFT down when you press the SEL/

SET button or MENU knob, you return to step 3

instead of the CLIP menu after a clip is moved. This

allows you to continue moving sub clips

Save the contents of the current clip list to disc.

See “Saving the Current Clip List to Disc” on page 98.

Adjusting Sub Clip In/Out Points

(Trimming)

Proceed as follows.

Carry out step 1 of the procedure in “Reordering Sub

Clips” on page 97, to display the CLIP menu.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“TRIM”, and press the button/knob.

This switches to the screen for selecting a thumbnail

for trimming.

CH-1

MIX

CH-2

CH-3

PRESET

AUTO

FRONT

WIRELESS

REAR

CH-1

MANUAL

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO IN

F-RUN

REGEN

OFF

SET

OFF

CLOCK

R-RUN

MONITOR

FRONT MIC

LOW CUT VIDEO OUT

CHARACTER

AUDIO LEVEL

THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP

MIX

CH-4

CH-1/2

CH-3/4

SHIFT CLIP MENU

SEL/SET 0 10 0 10

ESSENCE

MARK

CH-2

CH-3

CH-4

LITHIUM BATT

SHIFT button SEL/SET button

THUMBNAIL

button

MENU knob

Indicates that 2nd sub clip will be

moved to position of 7th sub clip.

Cursor showing position to which

selected sub clip will be moved.

98 Editing Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) or

MENU knob to select the desired sub clip, and press

the button/knob.

The first frame of the selected sub clip is displayed. In

this state you can play back or search the entire disc.

Carry out playback or search, to find the scene to be

the new In point or Out point of the selected sub clip.

You can also turn the MENU knob for a jog operation.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“IN” or “OUT” on the screen, and press the button/

knob.

The set timecode value appears as “IN” or “OUT”.

To reset an In point or Out point

Select “IN” or “OUT” on the screen and then press the

RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor.

The In or Out point returns to the value it had before

you entered the trim screen.

To cue up the In or Out point

(Do one of the following to cue up the In point.)

• With the SHIFT held down, press the PREV button.

• With the SEL/SET button pressed to the left, press

the PREV or NEXT button.

(Do one of the following to cue up the Out point.)

• With the SHIFT held down, press the NEXT button.

• With the SEL/SET button pressed to the right, press

the PREV or NEXT button.

When you are finished setting the In or Out point,

select “OK”.

The background of “OK” turns to yellow.

Press the SEL/SET button or MENU knob.

The trim is executed.

To continue trimming sub clips

With the SHIFT button held down, press the SEL/SET

button or the MENU knob. After the trim is executed,

you return to the screen of step 3 instead of the CLIP

menu. This allows you to continue trimming.

To cancel the trim

Press the SEL/SET button to the lower side (CLIP

MENU side).

Save the contents of the current clip list to disc.

See “Saving the Current Clip List to Disc” on page 98.

Deleting Sub Clips

Proceed as follows.

Carry out step 1 of the procedure in “Editing Clip

Lists” on page 97, to display the CLIP menu.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“DELETE”, and press the button/knob.

This switches to the screen for selecting a sub clip to

be deleted.

Use the SEL/SET button (four-way arrow key) or

MENU knob to select the sub clip to be deleted, and

press the button/knob. To make a multiple selection,

hold down the SHIFT button, and turn the MENU

knob.

A confirmation message appears.

Select “OK”, and press the button/knob.

This carries out the deletion.

To continue deleting sub clips

With the SHIFT button held down, press the SEL/SET

button or the MENU knob. After the deletion is

executed, you return to the screen of step 3 instead of

the CLIP menu. This allows you to continue deleting.

Save the contents of the current clip list to disc.

Saving the Current Clip List to Disc

Proceed as follows.

Display the CLIP menu.

See “To display the CLIP menu” on page 100.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“SAVE CLIP LIST” with the cursor in the CLIP

menu, and press the button/knob.

This displays the list of clip lists.

For a clip list in which no data has been stored, this

appears as “NEW FILE”.

To switch the information displayed for clip

lists

Press the SEL/SET button to the right side.

Editing Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Each press switches the information displayed for clip

lists in the following order.

Date and time of creation t Title t Clip list name

t Date and time of creation t ...

Select the desired clip list name, and press the button/

knob.

This saves the current clip list to disc.

To apply a desired title or name to a clip list

Use the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software.

For details, see the PDZ-1 online help.

Setting the Start Timecode for the

Current Clip List

By default, the start timecode (LTC) for the current clip list

is set to 00:00:00:00.

To set this to a different value, proceed as follows.

Display the CLIP menu.

See “To display the CLIP menu” on page 100.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to align the

cursor with “TC PRESET”, and press the button/knob.

The display appears as in the following figure.

The timecode shown is the start timecode currently set

for the current clip list.

Press the SEL/SET button left and right to select the

desired time unit (any of HOUR, MIN, SEC, and

FRAME).

Press the SEL/SET button up or down, or turn the

MENU knob to display the desired value.

When all time units are set correctly, press the SEL/

SET button or MENU knob.

This sets the start timecode for the current clip list,

which will be used for playback.

To cancel the timecode setting, hold down the SHIFT

button, and press the SEL/SET button down (CLIP

MENU).

Alternatively, press the RESET button on the right

side of the LCD monitor.

Save the current clip list.

See “Saving the Current Clip List to Disc” on page 98.

The DF/NDF timecode setting of the current clip list is

set to the current setting of the camcorder when one of

the following operations is performed.

• When you add the first sub clip

• When you set the start timecode

See page 123 for more information about DF/NDF

settings.

To Switch the Information Displayed

on Thumbnails

You can switch the information displayed at the bottom of

thumbnails in the thumbnail screen. You can also select

display of sequence numbers.

Proceed as follows.

Display the CLIP menu.

See “To display the CLIP menu” on page 100.

Select “CLIP INFORMATION”.

A sub menu appears.

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select the

information to display from among the following, and

then press the button or knob.

DATE: Date of recording

TIME CODE: Start timecode

DURATION: Whole length of clip

SEQUENCE NUMBER: Thumbnail sequence

number

The factory default setting is “TIME CODE”.

The display below each thumbnail changes depending

on the item selected.

Note

100 Managing Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

See “To switch the information displayed in the

thumbnail screen” (page 83) for more information

about SEQUENCE NUMBER. Managing Clip Lists

Using the CLIP menu, you can save created clip lists to

disc, read them from the disc into this unit, and delete them

from the disc.

To display the CLIP menu

In the thumbnail or clip list screen, hold down the SHIFT

button and press the SEL/SET button to the lower side

(CLIP MENU side).

The CLIP menu handles up to 99 clip lists.

The CLIP menu appears.

a) Displayed only in operating the thumbnail screen

b) Displayed only in operating the clip list screen

*=%@-'F)+P(;%#,)P%-,%#F(1+&-,G%&/(%*/+F&(1%'*1((,

Note

Item Function

CLIP INFORMATION Select the information to be

displayed below the thumbnails

!C##$%&'#"$B@$&7.$??*

LOAD CLIP LIST Load a clip list from the disc as

the current clip list !"##$

%&'# DED*

SAVE CLIP LIST Save the current clip list to the

disc!"##$%&'# ?B*

DELETE CLIP LIST Delete a clip list from the disc

!"##$%&'# DED*

SORT CLIP LISTS BY... You can sort the list of clip lists

by name or date and time of

creation !"##$%&'# DED*

SET INDEX PICTURE a) Change the thumbnail image of

a clip !"##$%&'# B@*

DELETE CLIP a) Delete a clip

LOCK/UNLOCK CLIP Lock or unlock a clip

LOCK OR DELETE ALL

CLIPS a)

Lock/unlook or delete all clips

!"##$%&'# BA*

TC PRESET b) Change the start timecode for

the current clip list to a desired

value !"##$%&'# ??*

ADD b) Add sub clips to the current clip

list$!"##$%&'# ?@*

MOVE b) Reorder sub clips

!"##$%&'# ?A*

TRIM b) Change the In point or Out

point of a sub clip

!"##$%&'# ?A*

DELETE b) Delete unnecessary sub clips

!"##$%&'# ?B*

DELETE SHOT MARK c) Delete a shot mark

!"##$%&'# B)*

101

Managing Clip Lists

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

To exit the CLIP menu

Carry out the same operation as when displaying the menu

(hold down the SHIFT button, and press the SEL/SET

button down (CLIP MENU)).

Loading a Clip List From the Disc as

the Current Clip List

Proceed as follows.

Display the CLIP menu.

See “To display the CLIP menu” on page 100.

Select “LOAD CLIP LIST”.

This displays the clip lists.

To switch the information displayed for clip

lists

Press the SEL/SET button to the right side.

Each press switches the information displayed for clip

lists in the following order.

Date and time of creation t Title t Clip list name

t Date and time of creation t ...

Select the desired clip list, and press the SEL/SET

button or MENU knob.

This loads the selected clip list as the current clip list.

To display thumbnails of the read-in

current clip list

Press the THUMBNAIL button to turn the

THUMBNAIL indicator on.

If the menu screen is displayed, move the MENU

switch to the OFF position and press the

THUMBNAIL button.

If you move the MENU switch to ON while

thumbnails are displayed, the thumbnail display

disappears, and the menu appears.

Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL/SET

button up to turn the SUB CLIP indicator on.

This displays thumbnails of the sub clips within the

clip list.

Deleting a Clip List From the Disc

Proceed as follows.

Display the CLIP menu.

See “To display the CLIP menu” on page 100.

Select “DELETE CLIP LIST”.

This displays the clip lists.

To switch the information displayed for clip

lists

Press the SEL/SET button to the right side.

Each press switches the information displayed for clip

lists in the following order.

Date and time of creation t Title t Clip list name

t Date and time of creation t ...

Select the clip list you want to delete, and press the

SEL/SET button or MENU knob.

A confirmation message appears.

Select OK, and press the SEL/SET button or MENU

knob.

This deletes the selected clip list from the disc.

To continue deleting other clip lists

After selecting “OK”, press the SEL/SET button while

holding down the SHIFT button. The selected clip list is

deleted, and you return to step 3 and can continue deleting

clip lists.

Sorting the List of Clip Lists

You can sort the list of clips lists that appears when you

select LOAD CLIP LIST and similar commands. Existing

clip lists can be sorted in order of name or in order of date

and time of creation.

Proceed as follows.

Display the CLIP menu.

See “To display the CLIP menu” (page 100).

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“SORT CLIP LISTS BY...”, and then press the button

or knob.

A screen like the one shown below appears.

102 Using the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software

Chapter 4 Scene Selection

Use the SEL/SET button or MENU knob to select

“NAME” or “DATE”, and then press the button or

knob.

NAME: Sort in ascending order by clip list name.

DATE: Sort by date of creation, with the newest clip

list first.

In the LOAD CLIP LIST and similar screens, the list

of existing clip lists is sorted by the method you chose

in step 3.

Unused clip lists are excluded from the sort.

If you selected “NAME”

If you selected “DATE”

Some characters in clip names, clip list names, and titles

may be converted to “s” characters for display in the

thumbnail screen and CLIP menu. For details, see page 78.

Using the PDZ-1 Proxy

Browsing Software

When a computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing

Software installed is connected to this unit, you can

transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on

a disc to the computer. On the computer side, PDZ-1

enables you to browse the proxy AV data, add or modify

metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, etc.), or create

a clip list.

The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be

written back to the disc loaded in this unit.

System requirements to use the PDZ-1

The following are required to use the PDZ-1.

• Computer:

PC with Intel Pentium III CPU, at least 1 GHz (installed

memory: at least 512 MB)

• Operating system: Microsoft Windows 2000 Service

Pack 4 or higher, or Microsoft Windows XP

Professional Service Pack 1 or higher

• Web browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or

higher

• DirectX: DirectX 8.1b or higher

To install the PDZ-1

Insert the supplied CD-ROM (PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing

Software) in the CD-ROM drive of the computer and

execute the Setup.exe file, then follow the installation

instructions.

For details, refer to the ReadMe file in the CD-ROM.

Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work

folder to store the material transferred from this unit has

adequate free space.

The amount of proxy AV data transferred is up to a

maximum of 2.8 GB per disc (LP format).

Note

BY NAME: Sort by name.

BY DATE: Sort by date.

Note

103

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Menu Displays and

Detailed Settings

Menu Organization and Operation

The following chart shows the organization of menus in

this camcorder.

Note that the USER menu organization shown in the chart

is as registered at the factory.

For details about USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, see

“Editing the USER Menu” on page 133.

104 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level

TOP MENU USER PAINT

SCENE FILE

FORMAT

SPECIAL EFFECTS

ASSIGNABLE

DISC

OUTPUT

VF SETTING

A.IRIS

DETAIL LEVEL

MASTER BLACK

GAMMA SELECT

MASTER GAMMA

BLACK GAMMA

PRESET MATRIX SEL

1-5

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID

SYSTEM

REC FORMAT

BIT RATE (HD)

AUDIO CH (HD)

ASPECT RATIO (DV)

COUNTRY

SLOW & QUICK [F350]

FRAME RATE [F350]

INTERVAL REC

INTERVAL TIME

NUMBER OF FRAME

NUMBER OF TIMES

PRE-LIGHTING

PICTURE CACHE

CACHE REC TIME

ASSIGN SW <1>

ASSIGN SW <2>

ASSIGN SW <3>

ASSIGN SW <4>

DELETE LAST CLIP

DELETE ALL CLIPS

QUICK FORMAT

COMPONENT OUT [F330]

HD SD (PLAY BACK)

VIDEO OUT SEL [F350]

i.LINK MODE

LIVE&PLAY [F350]

ZEBRA

ZEBRA SELECT

ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL

DETAIL FREQ

VF ASPECT

(Continued) (Continued)

105

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE

ALL

OPERATION

MARKER

SKIN DETAIL

RESET

FORMAT

SPECIAL EFFECTS

ASSIGNABLE

DISC

CLIP TITLE

FILE NAMING

GAIN SW

EZ MODE/TLCS

OFFSET WHITE

MARKER

CENTER

SAFETY ZONE

SAFETY AREA

ASPECT

ASPECT SELECT

SKIN DETAIL

SKIN DETAIL LVL

SKIN DETECT

SKIN AREA IND.

SKIN DTL SAT

SKIN DTL HUE

SKIN DTL WIDTH

ALL PRESET

SYSTEM

REC FORMAT

BIT RATE (HD)

AUDIO CH (HD)

ASPECT RATIO (DV)

COUNTRY

SLOW & QUICK [F350]

FRAME RATE [F350]

INTERVAL REC

INTERVAL TIME

NUMBER OF FRAME

NUMBER OF TIMES

PRE-LIGHTING

PICTURE CACHE

CACHE REC TIME

ASSIGN SW <1>

ASSIGN SW <2>

ASSIGN SW <3>

ASSIGN SW <4>

DELETE LAST CLIP

DELETE ALL CLIPS

QUICK FORMAT

TITLE

SELECT PREFIX

CLEAR NUMERIC

LOAD PREFIX DATA

PREFIX

NUMERIC

NAMING FORM

AUTO NAMING

GAIN LOW

GAIN MID

GAIN HIGH

GAIN TURBO

TLCS MODE

AGC LIMIT

AGC CHANGE POINT

AE LIMIT

AE CHANGE POINT

OFFSET WHITE <A>

WARM COOL <A>

COLOR FINE <A>

OFFSET WHITE

WARM COOL

COLOR FINE

(Continued) (Continued)

106 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level

OUTPUT

VIDEO OUT

VF SETTING

MARKER

VF DISP 1

VF DISP 2

LCD

SHOT ID

SHOT DISP

LENS FILE SEL

COMPONENT OUT [F330]

HD SD (PLAY BACK)

VIDEO OUT SEL [F350]

i.LINK MODE

LIVE&PLAY

VIDEO OUT VFDISP

VIDEO OUT MENU

VIDEO OUT TC

VIDEO OUT ZEBRA

VIDEO OUT MARKER

ZEBRA

ZEBRA SELECT

ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL

DETAIL FREQ

VF ASPECT

MARKER

CENTER

SAFETY ZONE

SAFETY AREA

ASPECT

ASPECT SELECT

DISP REC FORMAT

DISP BIT RATE

DISP SYSTEM

DISP FRAME RATE

DISP 16:9

DISP ZOOM

DISP FOCUS

DISP BATT REMAIN

DISP REC/PLAY

DISP TIME CODE

DISP 5600K

DISP FILTER

DISP WHITE

DISP GAIN

DISP SHUTTER

DISP AUDIO

DISP DISC

DISP IRIS

DISP LOW LIGHT

DISP INTERVAL

LCD COLOR

LCD MARKER&ZEBRA

ID-1

ID-2

ID-3

ID-4

SHOT DATE

DATE MODE

SHOT TIME

TIME MODE

SHOT ID SEL

LENS FILE SELECT

F.ID

L.ID

L.MF

(Continued) (Continued)

107

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level

PAINT

TIME/DATE

UMID SET

RESET

PAINT

SW STATUS

WHITE

KNEE

DETAIL

SKIN DETAIL

MATRIX 1

ADJUST

HOUR

MIN

SEC

YEAR

MONTH

DAY

COUNTRY CODE

ORGANIZATION

USER CODE

TIME ZONE: 00

ALL PRESET

A.IRIS

DETAIL LEVEL

MASTER BLACK

GAMMA SELECT

MASTER GAMMA

BLACK GAMMA

PRESET MTX SEL

GAMMA

MATRIX

KNEE

WHITE CLIP

DETAIL

COLOR TEMP <A>

C TEMP BAL <A>

R GAIN <A>

B GAIN <A>

D5600K<A>

COLOR TEMP

C TEMP BAL

R GAIN

B GAIN

D5600K

KNEE POINT

KNEE SLOPE

KNEE SAT LEVEL

WHITE CLIP LEVEL

DETAIL LEVEL

DTL H/V RATIO

DETAIL FREQUENCY

APERTURE LEVEL

KNEE APT LEVEL

SD DETAIL

CROSS COLOR

SKIN DETAIL

SKIN DETAIL LVL

SKIN DETECT

SKIN AREA IND.

SKIN DTL SAT.

SKIN DTL HUE

SKIN DTL WIDTH

MATRIX

USER MATRIX

USER MATRIX SAT

USER MATRIX HUE

PRESET MTX

PRESET MTX SEL

(Continued) (Continued)

108 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level

MAINTENANCE

MATRIX 2

LOW KEY SAT

SCENE FILE

AUDIO-1

AUDIO-2

TIME CODE

ESSENCE MARK

WHITE SETTING

CAM CONFIG

BATTERY 1

USER MATRIX R-G

USER MATRIX R-B

USER MATRIX G-R

USER MATRIX G-B

USER MATRIX B-R

USER MATRIX B-G

L.KEY SAT LEVEL

1-5

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID

AU REF LEVEL

AU AGC SPEC

AU LIMITER MODE

REAR MIC REF

FRONT MIC SELECT

AU CH12 AGC MODE

AU CH34 AGC MODE

AUDIO CH1 LEVEL

AUDIO CH2 LEVEL

AU SG (1KHz)

AU OUT LIMITER

HEADPHONE OUT

i.LINK AUDIO OUT

TC OUT

DF/NDF

UBIT

SHOTMARK 1

SHOTMARK 2

INDEX PIC. POS

COLOR TEMP

C TEMP BAL

WHITE SWITCH

ATW SPEED

SHOCKLESS WHITE

AWB FIXED AREA

WHT FILTER INH

COLOR BAR SEL

REC TALLY

SLOW MOTION [F350]

SHT DISP MODE

IRIS OVERRIDE

Info BEFORE END

Info END

Sony BEFORE END

Sony END

Other BEFORE END

Other END

DC IN BEFORE END

DC IN END

DETECTED BATTERY

(Continued) (Continued)

109

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level

FILE

BATTERY 2

GENLOCK

LENS

USER FILE

ALL FILE

SCENE FILE

LENS FILE 1

LENS FILE 2

LENS FILE 3

MEMORY STICK

TYPE DETECTION

SEGMENT No.7

SEGMENT No.6

SEGMENT No.5

SEGMENT No.4

SEGMENT No.3

SEGMENT No.2

SEGMENT No.1

GL H PHASE

H ADVANCE

ZOOM SELECT

ZOOM SPEED

AF DETECT AREA

USER FILE LOAD

USER FILE SAVE

F.ID

USER PRESET

CUSTOMIZE RESET

ALL FILE LOAD

ALL FILE SAVE

F.ID

ALL RESET

1-5

STANDARD

SCENE RECALL

SCENE STORE

F.ID

LENS FILE RECALL

LENS FILE STORE

F.ID

SOURCE

LENS NO OFFSET

IRIS GAIN

LENS AUTO RECALL

L.ID

L.MF

LENS M VMOD

LENS R FLARE

LENS G FLARE

LENS B FLARE

LENS W-R OFST

LENS W-B OFST

SHADING CH SEL

LENS R H SAW

LENS R H PARA

LENS R V SAW

LENS R V PARA

MS FORMAT

(Continued) (Continued)

110 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

TOP Menu

The TOP menu consists of the following submenus.

When you select an item in the TOP menu, this displays

the most recently shown page of the corresponding

submenu. When the submenu is selected for the first time,

the CONTENTS page appears.

USER menu

This menu allows you to add items from the

OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, and

DIAGNOSIS menus to suit your needs. By gathering

frequently used items on the USER menu beforehand, you

can call up them quickly whenever you need them.

Usually by flicking the MENU switch to ON, the USER

menu is displayed.

USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu

This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from

the USER menu to suit your needs.

ALL menu

This menu contains all items of the OPERATION, PAINT,

MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus as they

are in one menu.

OPERATION menu

This menu contains items for changing settings according

to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is

being operated.

PAINT menu

This menu contains items for making detailed image

adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor

the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video

engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although

you can also use an external remote control unit to set the

items on this menu, this menu is effective when using the

camcorder by itself outdoors.

MAINTENANCE menu

This menu includes contains items for making settings for

audio, timecode, essence marks, and battery.

FILE menu

This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the camcorder

memory or in a “Memory Stick”. The following files can

be saved.

User file

In the user file, the setting items and setting data of the

customized USER menu are saved. Once you save the user

Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level

DIAGNOSIS HOURS METER

DISC STATUS

CLIP STATUS

ROM VERSION

OPERATION

OPERATION (rst)

SPINDLE (rst)

LASER (rst)

LOADING (rst)

SEEK (rst)

USER ID

TITLE

REMAIN

REWRITE

SALVAGE

FILE SYSTEM

CLIP NO.

NAME

TITLE

RECORD DEVICE

SERIAL

DATE

TIME

PACKAGE

U SER

U SER M EN U CUSTO MI ZE

A LL

OPERATION

PAINT

MAINT EN AN CE

FILE

DIAGNOSIS

111

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

file in a “Memory Stick”, you can easily set the USER

menu to your preference by loading the data from the

“Memory Stick”.

For details on the user file, see “Saving and Loading User

Files” on page 146.

ALL file

In the ALL file, the setting data of all of the menus are

saved. Once a camcorder is set according to your

preferences and you save its ALL file in a “Memory

Stick”, you can easily set other camcorders to the settings

of the camcorder that you already set by loading the data

from the “Memory Stick”.

Items included in the ALL file are marked with an “A” in

the “File” column on the menu list.

Scene file

In the scene file, the setting values of event items adjusted

to shoot a particular scene are saved. You can save up to

five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100

scene files in a “Memory Stick”. For example, first adjust

the settings to shoot a particular scene at the rehearsal and

then save them as a scene file. Then load this file before the

actual shooting so that you can quickly recreate setup

conditions that are the same as those in rehearsal.

Items included in the scene file are marked with an “Sc”

in the “File” column on the menu list.

Lens file

In the lens file, the setting data used to compensate for the

characteristics of lenses, such as flare, white shading,!and

auto iris gain, is saved. You can save up to 32 lens files in

the camcorder memory and up to 100 lens files in a

“Memory Stick”.

Items included in the lens file are marked with an “L” in

the “File” column on the menu list.

DIAGNOSIS menu

This menu shows the digital hours meter, and disc and clip

status information.

Menu List

For settings registered on a USER menu page at the

factory, the “USER menu page” colomn in the following

list indicates the number of that page.

The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add

and delete pages to and from the USER menu to suit your

requirements.

When the setting range in the “Settings” column is

surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative

value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may

differ from what is shown in this manual.

“File” column

The letters in the “File” column stand for the following.

A: Items saved in the ALL file

Sc: Items saved in the scene file

L: Items saved in the lens file

St: Items whose setting is changed by the STANDARD

operation

OPERATION menu

Note

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

01 FORMAT SYSTEM 60I / 30P /

23.9P

(PAL: 50I /

25P)

60I (50I) 03 C##$5C#1#8/07'$/3#$F#8,-.07'$

+,-9&/:$,7$%&'#$)B;

–

REC FORMAT MPEG HD /

DVCAM MPEG

BIT RATE (HD) HQ / SP / LP SP A

AUDIO CH (HD) 2CH / 4CH 4CH

ASPECT RATIO (DV) 16:9 / 4:3 16:9

COUNTRY NTSC AREA /

NTSC(J)

AREA / PAL

AREA

–

112 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

02 SPECIAL

EFFECTS SLOW & QUICK ON / OFF OFF 04

Selects whether to use the slow &

quick-motion function.

FRAME RATE 1 to 30 (25) ,

60 (50) Fps 30P

Sets the shooting frame rate.

(When the slow & quick-motion

function is enabled)

INTERVAL REC ON / OFF OFF C##$5<09#G1&%"#$H0.#,$F#8,-.07'$

!5I7/#-J&1$F#8,-.07':$+K78/0,7*:$,7$

%&'#$AD;

INTERVAL TIME 1SEC to

10SEC /

15SEC /

20SEC /

30SEC /

40SEC /

50SEC,

1MIN to

10MIN /

15MIN /

20MIN /

30MIN /

40MIN /

50MIN,

1H to 6H /

12H / 24H

1SEC

NUMBER OF FRAME 1F / 3F / 6F 1F

NUMBER OF TIMES CONT / 50 /

100 / 200 /

300 / 500 /

800 / 1000

CONT

PRE-LIGHTING OFF / 2SEC /

5SEC /

10SEC

OFF

PICTURE CACHE OFF/ON OFF C##$5C/&-/07'$&$C3,,/$L0/3$&$+#M$

C#8,7."$,N$O-#GC/,-#.$O08/K-#$

P&/&$!O08/K-#$Q&83#$+K78/0,7*:$,7$

%&'#$AR;

CACHE REC TIME 0-2s/2-4s/4-

6s/6-8s/8-

10s/10-12s

0-2s

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGN SW <1> OFF /

MARKER /

ATW / LENS

RET / REC

SWITCH /

TURBO

SWITCH, etc.

EZMOD 05 C##$5S""0'707'$+K78/0,7"$/,$

SCCITU$CM0/83#":$,7$%&'#$DR(;

ASSIGN SW <2>

IRRCN

ASSIGN SW <3> OFF

ASSIGN SW <4>

04 DISC DELETE LAST CLIP EXEC EXEC 06 Deletes a clip recorded on the disc. –

DELETE ALL CLIPS Deletes all clips recorded on the

disc.

QUICK FORMAT Formats the disc. Any recorded

content is lost.

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

F350

113

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

05 CLIP TITLE CLIP TITLE ENABL /

DSABL DSABL – C##$5S""0'707'$V"#-GP#N07#.$Q10%$

<0/1#"$SK/,9&/08&11W:$,7$%&'#$A);

TITLE EXEC – –

SELECT PREFIX

CLEAR NUMERIC

LOAD PREFIX DATA

PREFIX A

NUMERIC –

06 FILE

NAMING NAMING FORM FREE/C**** C**** – Specify the clip and clip list name

format

C****: Standard format

FREE: Enable free format

AUTO NAMING TITLE/C**** Specify the format of the file

names generated when clips are

recorded

C****: Standard format

TITLE: Assign the same name as

clip title

07 GAIN SW GAIN LOW –3dB / 0dB /

3dB / 6dB /

9dB / 12dB /

18dB / 24dB /

30dB / 36dB /

42dB / 48dB

0dB – C##$5C#//07'$T&07$H&1K#"$N,-$/3#$

TSIU$CM0/83$O,"0/0,7":$,7$%&'#$

DRE;

GAIN MID 9dB

GAIN HIGH 18dB

GAIN TURBO 42dB

08 EZ MODE/

TLCS TLCS MODE AGC&AE /

AGC / AE AGC&

AE – Selects the TLCS function in EZ

mode.

AGC&AE: automatic gain and

shutter control

AGC: automatic gain control only

AE: automatic shutter control only

AGC-LIMIT 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /

12 / 15 / 18dB

(normal

setting value)

18dB Sets the upper limit for AGC

adjustment. This function operates

only when using the EZ mode.

AGC CHANGE

POINT OPEN / F2 /

F2.8 / F4 /

F5.6

F2.8 Sets the f-stop for switching from

automatic iris adjustment to AGC.

This function operates only when

using the EZ mode.

AE-LIMIT 1/100 to

1/250 1/250 Sets the upper limit for shutter

adjustment. This function operates

only when using the EZ mode.

AE CHANGE POINT F5.6 / F8 /

F11 / F16

(normal

setting value)

F16 Sets the f-stop for switching from

automatic iris adjustment to AE.

This function operates only when

using the EZ mode.

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

114 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

09 OFFSET

WHITE OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF / ON OFF – C##$5C%#80NW07'$&7$XNN"#/$N,-$/3#$

SK/,$L30/#$6&1&78#$C#//07':$,7$

%&'#$DRD;

WARM-COOL <A> Display color

temperature

(converted

from R / B

Gain).

3200

COLOR FINE <A> (–99 to 99) 0

OFFSET WHITE OFF/ON OFF

WARM-COOL Display color

temperature

(converted

from R/B

Gain).

3200

COLOR FINE (–99 to 99) 0

10 OUTPUT COMPONENT OUT AUTO /

HD YPbPr /

SD YPbPr

AUTO 07

Selects the output from the BNC

connector on the side panel of this

unit.

AUTO: Switch between HD YPbPr

and SD YPbPr, according to

the recording format. (For both

recording and playback)

HD YPbPr: Regardless of the

recording format, output HD

YPbPr when recording. Output

SD YPbPr only when playing

back DVCAM format.

SD YPbPr: Regardless of the

recording format, output SD

YPbPr. (For both recording and

playback)

VIDEO OUT SEL VBS / HD Y VBS

Selects the output from the VIDEO

OUT connector.

VBS: Output a composite signal.

HD Y: Output an HD Y signal.

HD$SD (PLAY

BACK) 16:9 / 4:3 16:9 Selects the aspect ratio for down-

converted output to an SD monitor

of playback of material recorded in

HD format.

You can select 16:9 (squeeze) or

4:3 (crop).

i.LINK MODE AV/C /FAM AV/C – Selects the function of the i.LINK

connector.

LIVE&PLAY OFF/HDSDI/

VBS OFF 07

C##$5H0#M07'$Q&9#-&$H0.#,$

PK-07'$O1&W4&8=$!Y0J#$Z$O1&W$

+K78/0,7*:$,7$%&'#$A?;

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

F330

F350

115

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

11 VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VFDISP OFF / ON ON – Selects whether or not the VF

DISP display signal is mixed to the

output signal from the VIDEO OUT

connector.

VIDEO OUT MENU Selects whether or not the menu

display signal is mixed to the

output signal from the VIDEO OUT

connector.

VIDEO OUT TC Selects whether or not the

timecode is mixed to the output

signal from the VIDEO OUT

connector.

VIDEO OUT ZEBRA OFF Selects whether or not the zebra

mark display signal is mixed to the

output signal from the VIDEO OUT

connector.

VIDEO OUT

MARKER Selects whether or not the marker

signal is mixed to the output signal

from the VIDEO OUT connector.

12 VF

SETTING ZEBRA OFF / ON OFF 08 C##$5C#//07'$/3#$H0#MN07.#-$C8-##7$

P0"%1&W:$,7$%&'#$D@B;

–

ZEBRA SELECT 1 / 2 / BOTH 1 A

ZEBRA1 DET. LEVEL 30% to 107%

(in 1% steps) 70%

DETAIL FREQ NORM /

HIGH HIGH

VF ASPECT AUTO / 4:3 AUTO

13 MARKER MARKER OFF / ON OFF 09 C##$5C#//07'$/3#$[&-=#-$P0"%1&W:$

,7$%&'#$D@A;

CENTER ON

SAFETY ZONE

SAFETY AREA 80% / 90% /

92% / 95% 90%

ASPECT OFF / ON OFF

ASPECT SELECT 14:9 / 13:9 /

4:3 4:3

14 VF DISP 1 DISP REC FORMAT OFF / ON ON – C##$5C#1#8/07'$/3#$P0"%1&W$I/#9":$

,7$%&'#$D@>;

DISP BIT RATE

DISP SYSTEM

DISP FRAME RATE

DISP 16:9

DISP ZOOM

DISP FOCUS

DISP BATT REMAIN INT / VOLT /

AUTO AUTO

DISP REC / PLAY OFF / ON ON

DISP TIME CODE OFF

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

116 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

15 VF DISP 2 DISP 5600K OFF / ON ON – C##$5C#1#8/07'$/3#$P0"%1&W$I/#9":$

,7$%&'#$D@>;

DISP FILTER

DISP WHITE

DISP GAIN

DISP SHUTTER

DISP AUDIO

DISP DISC

DISP IRIS

DISP LOW LIGHT

DISP INTERVAL

16 LCD LCD COLOR –137 to 62 0 – Adjusts the LCD color. A

LCD MARKER &

ZEBRA ON / OFF ON Selects whether to add the marker

and zebra to the LCD display, in

the same way as in the viewfinder.

17 SHOT ID ID-1 Displays

character

input mode

(up to 12

characters).

Blank – C##$5C#//07'$/3#$C3,/$IP:$,7$%&'#$

D@?;

ID-2

ID-3

ID-4

18 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF / ON OFF – C##$5F#8,-.07'$C3,/$P&/&$

CK%#-09%,"#.$,7$/3#$Q,1,-$6&-":$

,7$%&'#$D@B;

DATE MODE Y/M/D /

M/D/Y /

D/M/Y

Y/M/D

SHOT TIME OFF / ON OFF

TIME MODE 12H / 24H 12H

SHOT ID SEL OFF / ID-1 /

ID-2 / ID-3 /

ID-4

OFF

19 LENS FILE

SEL LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 – – Selects a lens file. Up to 32 files

can be registered. L

F.ID –Indicates the name of the selected

lens file.

L.ID Indicates the name of the lens file

corresponding to the connected

serial lens.

L.MF Indicates the fabricator of the

connected serial lens.

20 TIME / DATE ADJUST Displays the

TIME

ADJUST

selection

screen.

EXEC – C##$5C#//07'$/3#$P&/#$&7.$<09#$,N$

/3#$I7/#-7&1$Q1,8=:$,7$%&'#$@?;

–

HOUR 00 to 23 Internal

clock

MIN 00 to 59

SEC

YEAR 00 to 99

MONTH 01 to 12

DAY 01 to 31

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

117

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

21 UMID SET COUNTRY CODE 4-byte

alphanumeric

strings

– – C##$5V"07'$V[IP$P&/&:$,7$%&'#$

DAD;

ORGANIZATION

USER CODE

TIME ZONE 00 to xx 00

22 RESET ALL PRESET EXEC EXEC 11 Resets all settings at the USER

level. –

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

118 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

PAINT menu

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

01 PAINT A.IRIS –1.0 / –0.5 /

±0 / +0.5 /

+1.0

± 0 01 – –

DETAIL LEVEL – 0 Detail level adjustment A, Sc, St

MASTER BLACK – Master black level adjustment

GAMMA SELECT STD /

CINE1 /

CINE2 /

CINE3 /

CINE4

STD C##$5C#1#8/07'$T&99&$<&41#":$,7$

%&'#$DR(;

MASTER GAMMA (–99 to 99) 0 Sets master gamma correction

curve.

BLACK GAMMA (–99 to 99) Black gamma correction

PRESET MTX SEL STD / HISAT /

FL / CINE STD Matrix selection

02 SW STATUS GAMMA OFF / ON ON – Turns the gamma correction on or

off. A, Sc, St

MATRIX Turns the linear matrix correction

on or off.

KNEE Turns the knee correction on or off.

WHITE CLIP Turns the white clipping correction

on or off.

DETAIL Turns the detail signal on or off.

03 WHITE COLOR TEMP <A> Display color

temperature

(converted

from R / B

Gain).

3200 – Sets the color temperature of

WHITE A. A

C TEMP BAL <A> (–99 to 99) 0 Adjusts the value more precisely

when the color temperature

adjustment through COLOR TEMP

is not satisfactory.

R GAIN <A> Only the value of R GAIN is

changed.

B GAIN <A> Only the value of B GAIN is

changed.

D5600K<A> ON/OFF OFF Turns the WHITE A electronic

5600K filter on or off.

COLOR TEMP Display color

temperature

(converted

from R / B

Gain).

3200 Sets the color temperature of

WHITE B.

C TEMP BAL (–99 to 99) 0 Adjusts the value more precisely

when the color temperature

adjustment through COLOR TEMP

is not satisfactory.

R GAIN Only the value of R GAIN is

changed.

B GAIN Only the value of B GAIN is

changed.

D5600K ON/OFF OFF Turns the WHITE B electronic

5600K filter on or off.

119

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

04 KNEE KNEE POINT 50.0 to 109 .0

(in 0.1 steps) 85.0 – Sets the knee point level. A, Sc, St

KNEE SLOPE – 0 Sets the knee slope level.

KNEE SAT LEVEL (–99 to 99) Sets the knee saturation level.

WHITE CLIP LEVEL 100.0 to

109.5

(in 0.1 steps)

108.0 Adjusts the white clipping level.

05 DETAIL DETAIL LEVEL – 0 – Sets the general level of the detail

signal. A, Sc, St

DTL H/V RATIO Sets the level of the V detail signal.

DETAIL

FREQUENCY Sets the frequency of the H detail

signal.

APERTURE LEVEL Sets the aperture level.

KNEE APT LEVEL Sets the knee aperture level.

SD DETAIL LOW / MID /

HIGH MID Detail setting for down-converted

CROSS COLOR OFF / ON ON Turns the cross color component

on or off.

06 SKIN

DETAIL SKIN DETAIL OFF / ON OFF 10 Sets the skin detail on or off. A, Sc, St

SKIN DETAIL LVL – 0 Sets the detail level of detected

color.

SKIN DETECT Moves to

color

detection

page.

EXEC Detects the color for skin detail;–

SKIN AREA IND OFF / ON OFF Turns the indicator of detected

color on or off. St

SKIN DTL SAT (–99 to 99) 0 Adjusts the saturation level for skin

detail. A, Sc, St

SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 0 Adjusts the center phase for skin

detail.

SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 90 40 Adjusts the width for skin detail.

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

120 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

07 MATRIX 1 MATRIX OFF / ON ON – Turns the linear matrix correction

and user matrix correction

functions on or off.

A, Sc, St

USER MATRIX OFF Turns the user matrix correction

function on or off.

USER MATRIX SAT (–99 to 99) 0 Adjusts the saturation level

affected by the user matrix

correction function.

USER MATRIX HUE Adjusts the color phase affected by

the user matrix correction function.

PRESET MTX ON / OFF ON Turns the preset matrix correction

function on and off.

PRESET MTX SEL STD / HISAT /

FL / CINE STD When PRESET MTX is set to ON,

selects the matrix adjustment

value.

STD: settings for standard

shooting conditions

HISAT: settings for high saturation

shooting

FL: settings for fluorescent

illumination

CINE: settings to evoke the

impression of film camera

shooting

08 MATRIX 2 USER MATRIX R-G (–99 to 99) 0 – Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set

matrix coefficients. A, Sc, St

USER MATRIX R-B Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set

matrix coefficients.

USER MATRIX G-R Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set

matrix coefficients.

USER MATRIX G-B Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set

matrix coefficients.

USER MATRIX B-R Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set

matrix coefficients.

USER MATRIX B-G Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set

matrix coefficients.

09 LOW KEY

SAT L.KEY SAT LEVEL (–99 to 99) 0 – Sets the saturation level of the low

luminance part. A, Sc, St

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

121

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

10 SCENE FILE s1 –

STANDARD

02 Recalls a scene file saved in the

camcorder memory. –

sSTANDARD – – Clears all current detail-adjusted

settings and switch settings and

returns the settings to the standard

settings saved in the reference file.

SCENE RECALL Displays the

SCENE FILE

selection

screen.

EXEC Recalls a scene file from the

camcorder memory or the

“Memory Stick”.

SCENE STORE Stores a scene file in the

camcorder memory or the

“Memory Stick”.

F. ID Displays

character

input mode

(up to 16

characters).

Blank Sets the File ID. Sc

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

122 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

MAINTENANCE menu

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

01 AUDIO-1 AU REF LEVEL –20 / –18 /

–16 / –12 dB –20 dB – Sets the output level of the 1 kHz

test signal. A

AU AGC SPEC –6 / –9 / –12 /

–15 / –17 dB –6 dB AGC characteristic (saturation

level) setting

AU LIMITER MODE OFF / –6 /

–9 / –12 /

–15 / –17 dB

OFF During manual adjustment of audio

input levels, selects the limitter

characteristics (saturation level) for

large input signals.

REAR MIC REF –60 / –50 /

–40 dB –60 dB Selects the reference input level

when the AUDIO IN CH1 switch is

set to MIC.

FRONT MIC SELECT MONO /

STEREO STEREO Input mode selection for front

microphone

AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO /

STEREO MONO Selects whether to carry out

automatic adjustment of the input

levels of analog audio signals

recorded on channels 1 and 2

independently for the two channels

or to carry it out in stereo mode.

AU CH34 AGC MODE MONO /

STEREO Selects whether to carry out

automatic adjustment of the input

levels of analog audio signals

recorded on channels 3 and 4

independently for the two

channels, to carry it out in stereo

mode, or not at all.

AUDIO CH1 LEVEL SIDE1 /

FRONT / F +

FRONT When recording audio on channel

1, selects which knob is used for

adjustment.

SIDE1: Adjust with the left-hand

AUDIO LEVEL knob on the

side control panel.

FRONT: Adjust with the AUDIO

LEVEL knob on the front.

F + S1: Allow adjustment with

either of the left-hand AUDIO

LEVEL knob on the side control

panel or the AUDIO LEVEL

knob on the front. (The two

knobs function in linkage.)

AU CH2 LEVEL SIDE2 /

FRONT / F +

When recording audio on channel

2, selects which knob is used for

adjustment.

SIDE2: Adjust with the right-hand

AUDIO LEVEL knob on the

side control panel.

FRONT: Adjust with the AUDIO

LEVEL knob on the front.

F + S2: Allow adjustment with

either of the right-hand AUDIO

LEVEL knob on the side control

panel or the AUDIO LEVEL

knob on the front. (The two

knobs function in linkage.)

123

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

01 AUDIO-1 AU SG (1KHz) ON / OFF /

AUTO OFF – In the color bar mode, selects

whether to output a 1 kHz test

signal.

ON: Output.

OFF: Do not output.

AUTO: Output the test signal only

when the AUDIO SELECT

(CH-1) switch is set to AUTO.

02 AUDIO-2 AU OUT LIMITER ON / OFF ON – Turns the audio output limitter on

or off A

HEADPHONE OUT STEREO /

MONO MONO Selects whether the earphones are

monaural or stereo.

i.LINK AUDIO OUT 2CH / 4CH 2CH 2CH: Output channels 1 and 2 (16

bits, 48 ksps)

4CH: Output channels 1 to 4 (12

bits, 32 ksps)

03 TIMECODE TC OUT AUTO /

GENE AUTO – Timecode output setting

AUTO: For recording, the timecode

generator value is output, and

for playback, the value from

timecode reader is output.

GENE: The timecode generator

value is output for both

recording and playback.

DF / NDF DF / NDF DF DF / NDF setting

DF: drop-frame mode

NDF: non-drop-frame mode

UBIT FIX / TIME FIX Selects the user bit contents.

04 ESSENCE

MARK SHOTMARK 1 OFF / ON ON – C##$5F#8,-.07'$C3,/$[&-=":$,7$

%&'#$AE;

SHOTMARK 2

INDEX PIC. POS 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 /

4 / 5 / 6 / 7 /

8 / 9 / 10SEC

0 Sets the position of the index frame

of a clip, in seconds from the start

of recording.

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

124 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

05 WHITE

SETTING COLOR TEMP Displays color

temperature

(converted

form R / B

Gain).

3200 – Preset white balance color

temperature setting. A

C TEMP BAL (–99 to 99) 0 Finer setting when the desired

color could not be obtained with

the COLOR TEMP color

temperature setting

WHITE SWITCH ATW / MEM MEM Selects mode when the WHITE

BAL switch is in the B position.

ATW: auto tracking white balance

MEM: auto white balance

ATW SPEED 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 4 Switches the ATW transition

speed.

SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF / 1 / 2 / 3 1 Selects whether to enable the

function that smooths out the white

gain variation as the WHITE BAL

switch is switched, and sets the

transition rate. (1 represents the

fastest.)

AWB FIXED AREA ON / OFF ON Increases the AWB speed.

WHT FILTER INH OFF / ON OFF Turns on and off the function which

inhibits independent white balance

memory for each filter position.

06 CAM

CONFIG COLOR BAR SEL MULTI / 75% /

100% MULTI – Selects color bar type. A

REC TALLY UPPER /

BOTH UPPER Selects whether to light the upper

REC/TALLY indicator only, or both

upper and lower indicators.

SLOW MOTION NORMAL /

EXPAND NORMAL

NORMAL: Allows you to select the

frame rate over the limited

range 4P to 30P and 60P, or 4P

to 25P and 50P.

EXPAND: Allows you to select the

frame rate over the full range

4P to 60P (without limitation),

or 4P to 50P (without

limitation).

SHT DISP MODE DEG / SEC SEC Selects whether the SHUTTER

indication is shown as a time

indication or as an angle indication.

IRIS OVERRIDE ON/OFF ON Turns on and off the function which

changes the reference value for

automatic iris adjustment

C##$5<,$83&7'#$/3#$-#N#-#78#$

J&1K#:$,7$%&'#$>R

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

F350

125

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

07 BATTERY 1 Info BEFORE END 5 / 10 / 15

...95 / 100% 5% – Used when a BP-GL95/GL65

Battery Pack is used. Sets the

remaining power (% value) of the

battery at which the BEFORE END

warning should be issued.1)

Info END 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 /

4 / 5% 0% Used when a BP-GL95/GL65

Battery Pack is used. Sets the

remaining power (% value) of the

battery at which the END warning

should be issued.2)

Sony BEFORE END 11.5 to 17.0V

(in 0.1 V

steps)

11.5V Used when a BP-L60S/L80S

Battery Pack is used. Sets the

voltage level of the battery at which

the BEFORE END warning should

be issued.1)

Sony END 11.0 to 11.5V

(in 0.1 V

steps)

11.0V Used when a BP-L60S/L80S

Battery Pack is used. Sets the

voltage level of the battery at which

the END warning should be issued.

Other BEFORE END 11.5 to 17.0V

(in 0.1 V

steps)

11.8V Used when a battery pack other

than a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S

is used. Sets the voltage level of

the battery at which the BEFORE

END warning should be issued.

Other END 11.0 to 14.0V

(in 0.1 V

steps)

11.0V Used when a battery pack other

than a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S

is used. Sets the voltage level of

the battery at which the END

warning should be issued.

DC IN BEFORE END 11.5 to 17.0V

(in 0.1 V

steps)

11.8V Used when an external power

source is connected to the DC IN

connector. Sets the voltage level of

the connected external power

source at which the BEFORE END

warning should be issued.

DC IN END 11.0 to 14.0V

(in 0.1 V

steps)

11.0V Used when an external power

source is connected to the DC IN

connector. Sets the voltage level of

the connected external power

source at which the END warning

should be issued.

DETECTED

BATTERY Info / Sony /

Other / DC IN

(display only)

– Displays the type of automatically

detected battery. –

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

126 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

08 BATTERY 2 TYPE DETECTION AUTO /

OTHER AUTO – AUTO: Automatically detects

battery type.

OTHER: Determines battery type

as always “Others”.

SEGMENT NO.7 11.0 to 17.0V

(in 0.1 V

steps)

17.0V When “Others” is determined,

remaining battery capacity

indicator segment 7 lights when

below the set voltage.

[Battery battery capacity indicator

segment]

SEGMENT NO.6 16.0V When “Others” is determined,

remaining battery capacity

indicator segment 6 lights when

below the set voltage.

SEGMENT NO.5 15.0V When “Others” is determined,

remaining battery capacity

indicator segment 5 lights when

below the set voltage.

SEGMENT NO.4 14.0V When “Others” is determined,

remaining battery capacity

indicator segment 4 lights when

below the set voltage.

SEGMENT NO.3 13.0V When “Others” is determined,

remaining battery capacity

indicator segment 3 lights when

below the set voltage.

SEGMENT NO.2 12.0V When “Others” is determined,

remaining battery capacity

indicator segment 2 lights when

below the set voltage.

SEGMENT NO.1 11.0V When “Others” is determined,

remaining battery capacity

indicatorsegment 1 lights when

below the set voltage.

09 GENLOCK GL H PHASE (–99 to 99) 0 –Sets horizontal phase for genlock. A

H ADVANCE 0H / 90H 0H Selects the output phase when an

SD reference signal is input.

0H: Make SD REF and HD OUT in

phase.

90H: Make the HD OUT phase

90H with offset respect to the

SD reference signal

(When an HD reference signal

is input, HD REF and HD OUT

are in phase.)

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

1 765432

127

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

1) When TYPE DETECTION on the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER,

this follows the setting of BEFORE END.

2) When TYPE DETECTION on the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER,

this follows the setting of END.

FILE menu

10 LENS ZOOM SELECT 1 / 2 1 –To control zoom from the RM-F300

Infrared Remote Commander

when a 1/2-inch lens is mounted,

set this item according to the

manufacturer of the lens (some

lenses do not require a setting).

1: Select when you are using a

Canon lens

2: Select when you are using a

Fujinon lens

ZOOM SPEED 0 to 99 20 Switches the zoom speed.

AF DETECT AREA FULL /

CENTER CENTER Selects the auto focus detection

area.

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD Displays the

USER FILE

selection

screen.

EXEC – C##$5C&J07'$&7.$Y,&.07'$V"#-$

+01#":$,7$%&'#$DR>;

–

USER FILE SAVE

F. ID Displays

character

input mode

(up to 16

character).

Blank

USER PRESET After asking

YES / NO,

executes the

function.

EXEC C##$5F#"#//07'$VC\F$[#7K$

C#//07'"$/,$/3#$C/&7.&-.$C#//07'":$

,7$%&'#$D@);

CUSTOMIZE RESET After asking

YES / NO,

executes the

function.

EXEC Returns the pages registered in

the USER menu to the factory

default state.

02 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD Displays the

FILE

selection

screen.

EXEC – Loads ALL file. –

ALL FILE SAVE Saves ALL file.

F. ID Displays

character

input mode

(up to 16

character).

Blank Names ALL file. A

ALL PRESET After asking

YES / NO,

executes the

function.

EXEC Returns items in ALL file to preset

values. –

128 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

03 SCENE FILE s1 –

STANDARD

–C##$5C&J07'$&7.$Y,&.07'$V"#-$

+01#":$,7$%&'#$DR>;

–

sSTANDARD

SCENE RECALL Displays the

SCENE FILE

selection

screen.

EXEC

SCENE STORE

F. ID Displays

character

input mode

(up to 16

characters).

Blank Sc

04 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL Displays the

FILE

selection

screen.

EXEC – Loads lens file. –

LENS FILE STORE Saves lens file.

F. ID Displays

character

input mode

(up to 16

characters).

Blank Names lens file. L

SOURCE – – Displays number of selected lens

file. –

LENS NO OFFSET After asking

YES / NO,

executes the

function.

EXEC Resets the lens file to standard.

IRIS GAIN (–99 to 99) – Adjusts the response speed of the

auto iris according to the lens. L

LENS AUTO RECALL ON/OFF Selects whether to automatically

read in a lens file. A

<LENS

INFORMATION> – – –

L.ID Lens file name for connected serial

lens

L.MF Lens manufacturer for connected

serial lens

05 LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD (–99 ~ +99) 0 – Sets lens file V SAW shading. L

LENS R FLARE – – Adjusts lens file flare (R).

LENS G FLARE Adjusts lens file flare (G).

LENS B FLARE Adjusts lens file flare (B).

LENS W-R OFST Compensates R value when

extender and shrinker used.

LENS W-B OFST Compensates B value when

extender and shrinker used.

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

129

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

DIAGNOSIS menu

06 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL R / G / B R –Selects the channel adjusted by

this menu. –

LENS R H SAW White shading correction L

LENS R H PARA

LENS R V SAW

LENS R V PARA

07 MEMORY

STICK FORMAT After asking

YES / NO,

executes the

function.

EXEC – Formats “Memory Stick”. –

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

01 HOURS

METER OPERATION Display only – – Shows cumulative time that this

unit has been powered on, in units

of 1 hour.

–

OPERATION (rst) Shows cumulative light output

parameters of optical head

(resettable).

SPINDLE (rst) Shows cumulative total time of

spindle rotation, in units of 1 hour

(resettable).

LASER (rst) Shows cumulative light output

parameters of optical head

(resettable).

LOADING (rst) Shows cumulative count of disc

insertions (resettable).

SEEK (rst) Shows cumulative total of optical

head seek operation time, in units

of 1 hour (resettable).

02 DISC

STATUS USER ID Display only – – Shows the user ID on the disc

itself. –

TITLE Shows the title on the disc itself.

REMAIN Shows the remaining disc capacity.

REWRITE Shows number of rewrites.

SALVAGE When salvage is required, shows

“required”.

FILE SYSTEM When the file system cannot be

recognized or there is a fault,

shows “unknown”.

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

130 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

03 CLIP

STATUS CLIP NO. Display only – – In NORMAL MODE: current clip

number/total clip count

In CLIP LIST MODE: clip list

number

–

NAME In NORMAL MODE: current clip

name

In CLIP LIST MODE: clip list name

TITLE In NORMAL MODE: current clip

title

In CLIP LIST MODE: clip list title

RECORD DEVICE In NORMAL MODE: name of

device on which current clip was

recorded

In CLIP LIST MODE: shows “-----”.

SERIAL In NORMAL MODE: serial number

of device on which current clip

was recorded

In CLIP LIST MODE: shows “-----”.

DATE In NORMAL MODE: date current

clip was recorded

In CLIP LIST MODE: date clip list

was created

TIME In NORMAL MODE: time current

clip was recorded

In CLIP LIST MODE: time clip list

was created

04 ROM

VERSION AT Display only – – Displays the ROM version. –

PACKAGE

No. Page Item Settings Default USER

page

Description File

131

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Displaying Menus

When the camcorder is powered on, flick the MENU

switch to the ON position to display the menu on the

viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor.

If this is the first time the menu has been used after the

camcorder has been powered on, the USER menu is

displayed. If the menu has been used before, the last

accessed page appears.

When the menu is not displayed on the LCD

monitor

Press the DISPLAY/EXPAND button at the lower left of

the LCD monitor to select the CHAR display.

To clear the menu display from the screen

Flick the MENU switch to OFF.

When the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder is set to ON,

the display indicating the current status of the camcorder

appears on the viewfinder screen.

For details, see “Selecting the Display Items” on page

136.

To display the TOP menu

With no menu displayed on the screen, hold down the

MENU knob and flick the MENU switch to the ON

position.

Basic Menu Operations

By pressing and turning the MENU knob, you can set

various menu items. In the remainder of this section, the

LCD monitor is generally shown as an example of the

menu display, but a similar display also appears on the

viewfinder screen.

To select the setting items and values on

the menu

Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases explained

below.

To scroll pages

To select a menu or setting item

To change a setting value

View

inder

MENU switch

LCD monitor

POWER switch

MENU knob

TO P? 0 8 O UT PU T

C O MPO NE NT OU T: AU TO

H D SD (P LA Y B AC K) : 16 :9

TO P? 0 9 V F SE TTI NG

Z E BRA :OF F

Z E BRA S EL ECT :1

Z E BRA 1 DE T.L EV EL :70 %

D E TAI L FR EQ :NO RM

V F AS PE CT :AU TO

When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to switch pages.

When b appears, turn the MENU knob to move b up and down.

TO P 0 8 O UT PU T

C O MPO NE NT OU T: AU TO

H D SD (P LA Y B AC K) : 16 :9

TO P 0 8 O UT PU T

C O MPO NE NT OU T: AU TO

H D SD (P LA Y B AC K) : 16 :9

TOP 08 OUTPUT

C O MPO NE NT OU T: ? AU TO

H D SD (P LA Y B AC K) : 16 :9

TO P 0 8 OU TP UT

C O MPO NE NT OU T: ? Y Pb Pr

H D SD (P LA Y B AC K) : 16 :9

When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to change the setting (ON/OFF,

value, etc.).

132 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

To confirm the selection of a menu, a

setting item, or a setting value

Each time you press the MENU knob, the menu display

switches in the following sequence.

Example: When using the OPERATION menu

If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the

camcorder is powered on, “TOP” does not appear at the

upper right on the above screen, and you cannot go to the

TOP menu. In this case, follow the procedure in “To

display the TOP menu” on page 131.

To display the TOP menu when another menu is

displayed

Move b to “TOP” displayed at the top right of each page

of the menu, and press the MENU knob. Or push the

MENU switch repeatedly to ON until the TOP menu is

displayed.

Using the USER Menu (Example

Menu Operation)

This section explains menu operations using the USER

menu as an example. The operations are the same for the

ALL, OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE,

and DIAGNOSIS menus. For details about how to operate

the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, see “Editing the

USER Menu” on page 133.

Flick the MENU switch to ON.

Normally, the USER menu appears.

If it does not, turn the MENU knob to move b to

USER in the TOP menu, and press the MENU knob.

If the USER menu has been used before, the last

accessed page appears. In this case, go to step 2.

If this is the first time the USER menu has been

displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu

appears. In this case, follow the procedure below.

1Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob

to move b to the desired page number.

2Press the MENU knob again.

The page selected in 1 is displayed. Go to step 3.

When you set items on the ALL, OPERATION,

PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, or DIAGNOSIS

menu, move b to the menu that contains the desired

item in the TOP menu, and then press the MENU

knob.

Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.

Press the MENU knob.

b and z appear.

Note

< T OP ME N U>

USER

U S ER M EN U C U STO M IZE

ALL

O PER A TI ON

PAINT

M AIN T EN ANC E

FILE

D IAG N OS IS

TO P? 0 0 C O NTE N TS

0 1 .FO R MAT

0 2 .SP E CIA L E FFE C TS

0 3 .AS S IGN A BL E

0 4 .DI S C

0 5 .CL I P T I TL E

0 6 .GA I N S W

0 7 .EZ MOD E / TL C S

0 8 .OF F SET WH ITE

0 9 .OU T PUT

1 0 .VI D EO O UT

TO P 0 0 CO N TE NTS

0 1 .FO R MAT

0 2 .SP E CIA L E FFE C TS

0 3 .AS S IGN A BL E

0 4 .DI S C

0 5 .CL I P T I TL E

0 6 .GA I N S W

0 7 .EZ MOD E / TL C S

0 8 .OF F SET WH ITE

0 9 .OU T PUT

1 0 .VI D EO O UT

TO P 0 9 O U TPU T

C O MPO N EN T O U T: A UTO

H D SD ( PL AY B ACK ) : 1 6:9

TO P? 0 9 O U TPU T

C O MPO N EN T O U T: A UTO

H D SD ( PL AY B ACK ) : 1 6:9

TO P 0 9 OU T PUT

C O MPO N EN T O U T: ? A UTO

H D SD ( PL AY B ACK ) : 1 6:9

TOP menu

If the menu has been

used before

Menu selection page

If the menu

has not

been used

Setting value selection mode

Setting item selection mode

CONTENTS page

Menu selection mode

TO PU0 0 CON TE NT S

01.PAINT

0 2.SCE NE F ILE

03.FORMAT

04.SPECIAL EFFECTS

0 5.ASS IG NA BLE

06.DISC

07.OUTPUT

0 8.VF SE TT ING

09.MARKER

This indicates

that the menu

screen can be

scrolled.

TOP?U01 PAINT

A .IRIS : 0

D ETAIL L EV EL : 0

M ASTER B LA CK : 0

GAMMA SELECT : STD

MASTER BLK GAMMA: 0

B LACK GA MM A : O FF

P RESET M TX SEL : S TD

133

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item,

and then press the MENU knob.

b changes to z, and z changes to ?.

Turn the MENU knob to change the setting.

Depending on the direction of turning the knob, the

setting value increases, decreases, switches between

ON and OFF, and so on.

If you want to cancel a change or return to the standard

settings, see the items below “To interrupt changing

the settings” and “To return to the factory default

settings”.

To interrupt changing the settings

Flick the MENU switch to OFF.

By flicking the MENU switch to ON again, the values

that were displayed when you interrupted the setting

operations will reappear so you can continue making

settings.

Press the MENU knob.

z changes to b, and ? changes to z. The selection is

confirmed.

To continue setting other items on the same page,

repeat steps from 4 to 6.

To end the menu operation, flick the MENU switch to

OFF.

The menu disappears from the screen, and the display

indicating the current status of the camcorder appears

along the top and bottom of the screen.

To return to the factory default settings

By pressing and holding the MENU knob in step 5 of the

above procedure, the settings return to the factory default

values.

To move to another page

When ? appears in front of the page number

Turn the MENU knob to switch pages.

When nothing appears in front of the page

number

Turn the MENU knob to move b to the page number, and

press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to

switch pages.

Editing the USER Menu

The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to

configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and

items that you need by adding, deleting or replacing the

pages.

To add a new page

The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add

a new page to the USER menu.

While the EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the

USER 9 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages are all blank in

their initial state. You can register up to 10 items, including

blank lines, on each of these pages.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the TOP menu (see page 131).

Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, and press the

MENU knob.

If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE

menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the

menu appears.

If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been

used before, the last accessed page appears.

TO P U 01 PA IN T

A .IRIS : 0

D ETAIL L EV EL : 0

M ASTER B LA CK : 0

G AMMA SE LE CT : S TD

M ASTER B LK GAMM A: 0

B LACK GA MM A : O FF

P RESET M TX SEL : S TD

TOP?U01 PAINT

A.IRIS : 0

DETAIL LEVEL : 0

MASTER BLACK : 0

GAMMA SELECT : STD

MASTER BLK GAMMA: 0

BLACK GAMMA : OFF

PRESET MTX SEL : STD

Page number

TOP?E00 CONTENTS

01.EDIT PAGE

0 2.USE R 1 ED IT

0 3.USE R 2 ED IT

0 4.USE R 3 ED IT

0 5.USE R 4 ED IT

0 6.USE R 5 ED IT

0 7.USE R 6 ED IT

0 8.USE R 7 ED IT

0 9.USE R 8 ED IT

1 0.USE R 9 ED IT

134 Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU

knob. Then select one of USER 1 EDIT to USER 19

EDIT, and press the MENU knob.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob

until the desired page appears, then press the MENU

knob.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the line where you

want to add an item, and press the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Press the MENU knob. Then select INSERT, and

press the MENU knob.

The page for the last added item appears.

Add the items as follows.

1Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains

the desired items appears, then press the MENU

knob.

2Select the desired item, and press the MENU

knob.

The USER 9 EDIT page appears again, displaying the

newly added item.

Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining items.

You can add up to 10 items on one page.

To delete items from a page by using the MENU

knob

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” on page

133.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you

wan to delete, and press and hold the MENU knob.

The item is deleted.

To delete items from a page by using the EDIT

FUNCTION page

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” on page

133.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you

want to delete, and press the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob.

The previously displayed page appears again, and the

message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears at the

upper right.

To delete, select YES, and press the MENU knob.

To replace items on a page

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” on page

133.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you

want to replace, and press the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select MOVE, and press the MENU knob.

The previously displayed page appears again.

Select the position to which you want to move the

item, and press the MENU knob.

The item selected in step 2 moves to the position that

you selected in step 4.

To insert a blank line

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” on page

133.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the item above

which you want to insert a blank line, and press the

MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select BLANK, and press the MENU knob.

The previously displayed page appears again, and a

blank line is inserted above the specified item.

You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items

have already been registered.

TO P E 10 US ER 9 EDIT

Example: When the USER 9 EDIT page is selected

ES C ED IT F UNCTI ON

INSERT

MOVE

DELETE

BLANK

Note

135

Menu Organization and Operation

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

To add/delete/replace pages

You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page

from the USER menu, or replace pages, using the EDIT

PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.

To add a page

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the TOP menu (see page 131).

Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, and press the

MENU knob.

If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE

menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page

appears. If the menu has been used before, the last

accessed page appears.

If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU

knob. Then select EDIT PAGE, and press the MENU

knob.

If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob

until the EDIT PAGE screen appears.

The EDIT PAGE appears.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the position where

you want to add the page, and press the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob.

The CONTENTS page appears.

Select the desired page, and press the MENU knob.

The number and name of the page selected in step 6 is

added above the item selected in step 4.

To cancel adding a page

Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6, select ESC

at the top right of the screen, and press the MENU

knob.

The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.

To delete a page by using the MENU knob

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you

want to delete, and hold down the MENU knob.

To delete a page by using the EDIT FUNCTION

page

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you

want to delete, and press the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob.

The previously displayed page appears again, and the

message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears at the

upper right.

Select YES, and press the MENU knob.

To replace a page

Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you

want to move, and press the MENU knob.

The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.

Select MOVE, and press the MENU knob.

The previous screen appears again.

Select the position to which you want to move the page

selected in step 2, and press the MENU knob.

The page is moved to the position selected in step 4.

Resetting USER Menu Settings to

the Standard Settings

You can return all settings in the USER menu to the

standard settings.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

0 1.PAI NT

0 2.FOR MA T

0 3.OUT PU T

0 4.ASS IG NA BLE

0 5.SPE CI AL @EFFEC TS

0 6.VF SE TT ING

0 7.SKI N DE TAIL

0 8.SCE NE F ILE

0 9.RES ET

END O F PAGE

TO P?E 01 ED IT P AGE

136 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Press the MENU knob, then select USER PRESET,

and press the MENU knob.

The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO” appears.

Select YES, and press the MENU knob.

The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset

to the standard settings.

Setting the Status Display

on the Viewfinder Screen

and the LCD Monitor

This section explains the menu settings for the display of

the viewfinder screen. These settings are also used for the

display of the LCD monitor in the same way.

Selecting the Display Items

To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder

screen (with the viewfinder DISPLAY set to ON) and the

LCD monitor, use the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of

the OPERATION menu.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU

knob.

On the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages, you can

select the following items to be displayed on the

screen.

VF DISP 1 page

1) This item may not appear depending on the mounted lens.

TO P?F 01 US ER F ILE

U SER F IL E LOAD : EX EC

U SER F IL E SAVE : EX EC

F .ID :

sssssssssssssssss

U SER P RE SE T : EX EC

C USTOM IZ E RESET : EX EC

TO P?F 01 US ER F ILE

PRES ET O K? YE S NO

U SER F IL E LOAD : EX EC

U SER F IL E SAVE : EX EC

F .ID :

sssssssssssssssss

U SER P RE SE T : EX EC

C USTOM IZ E RESET : EX EC

Item Description

DISP REC

FORMAT Displays the recording format.

DISP BIT RATE Indication of HQ, SP or LP

recording.

DISP SYSTEM System frequency

DISP FRAME

RATE Indication of frame rate during slow

& quick-motion recording.

DISP 16:9 Aspect ratio indication when

recording SD signals

DISP ZOOM1) Zoom position indication

DISP FOCUS1) Focus setting

DISP BATT

REMAIN2)

Displays the battery voltage or

battery remaining capacity.

DISP REC/PLAY REC, PLAY, F REV, and F FWD

indications

DISP TIME CODE Displays the timecode.

137

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

2) When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP-GL65/GL95 battery

pack is installed, the remaining battery power is shown as a

percentage value (%) according to the setting of this item.

INT: When one of the above batteries is installed, the remaining

power is shown as a percentage value (%) when there is a change in

the value or when the power is low.

AUTO: The remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%)

when one of the above batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage

(VOLT) is displayed continuously.

VOLT: The voltage (VOLT) is displayed continuously.

VF DISP 2 page

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the

desired items.

Change Confirmation/Adjustment

Progress Messages

The messages indicating setting changes, progress and

consequence of adjustments, and the situations indicated

by these messages are as follows.

Setting change confirmation/adjustment progress

messages

1) The corresponding message is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the

SHUTTER switch is set to ON.

Setting the Marker Display

You can switch the display of the center and safety zone

markers on or off and select whether the area indicated by

the safety zone marker is 80%, 90%, 92.5%, or 95% of the

screen area.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the MARKER page of the USER (or

OPERATION) menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU

knob.

You can set the following items on the MARKER

page.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have set all of the

desired items.

Item Description

DISP 5600K Displays “5600K”.

DISP FILTER Displays types of the ND filter.

DISP WHITE Displays selected white balance

memory.

DISP GAIN Displays gain value.

DISP SHUTTER Displays shutter speed and ECS

mode.

DISP AUDIO Displays audio level.

DISP DISC Displays remaining disc capacity.

DISP IRIS Lens iris setting indication

DISP LOW LIGHT “LOW LIGHT” indication when the

average video level is below a

certain threshold.

DISP INTERVAL “INTERVAL TIME” indication

during interval recording.

Situation Message to appear

The filter selection has been

changed FILTER: n

(where n = 1, 2, 3, 4)

The gain setting has been

changed GAIN: n

(where n = –3dB, 0dB, 3dB,

6dB, 9dB,12dB, 18dB, 24dB,

30dB, 36dB, 42dB, 48dB)

The setting of the WHITE

BAL switch has been

changed

WHITE: n

(where n = A CH, B CH,

PRESET) or ATW: RUN

The OUTPUT/DCC switches

has been set to DCC ON or

OFF

DCC: ON (or OFF)

The shutter speed and mode

setting has been changed 1)

: SHUTTER: 1/100 (or 1/125,

1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,

ECS, SLS)

The black or white balance

has been adjusted E.g. WHITE: OK

Item Description

MARKER If you want no markers to be

displayed, set to OFF.

CENTER To display the center marker, set

to ON.

SAFETY ZONE To display the safety zone, set to

ON.

SAFETY AREA Selects the safety zone area.

ASPECT To display the aspect marker, set

to ON.

ASPECT SELECT Selects the type of the aspect

marker. (14:9/13:9/4:3)

Situation Message to appear

138 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Setting the Viewfinder Screen

Display

You can make settings for viewfinder screen display

functions (zebra display, VF detail function, and aspect

ratio).

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the VF SETTING page of the USER

(OPERATION) menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU

knob.

You can set the following items on the VF SETTING

page.

1) When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with a ZEBRA

switch, turns the display on or off using this item. When you use the

viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch, the switch operation and the

operation of this menu are both effective (the most recent operation

prevails).

2) When the VF ASPECT item is set to AUTO, this is linked to the

setting of the “ASPECT RATIO (DV)” item on the FORMAT page.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the

desired items.

Recording Shot Data Superimposed

on the Color Bars

You can select which shot data is recorded superimposed

on the color bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs

(1 to 4) set on the SHOT ID page is recorded superimposed

on the picture.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SHOT DISP page of the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU

knob.

You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP

page.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the

desired items.

To carry out superimposed recording

To actually record the items selected for superimposed

recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC

switch to BARS, DCC OFF. The items selected for

superimposed recording appear on the screen and are

recorded superimposed on the color bars.

(Display example: shows case where SHOT DATE is

ON.)

Item Description

ZEBRA Turns the zebra display ON or

OFF. 1)

ZEBRA SELECT Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or

BOTH.

ZEBRA 1 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the ZEBRA 1

display (30% to 107%). (Factory

default setting is 70%.)

DETAIL FREQ Turns the VF detail function on or

off and adjusts the level. (NORM/

HIGH)

VF ASPECT Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio

(AUTO/4:3). 2)

Item Description

SHOT DATE Selects whether or not the shot

data is superimposed.

DATE MODE Selects the date display format.

(One of Y/M/D, M/D/Y, and D/M/Y)

SHOT TIME Selects whether or not shot time

is superimposed.

TIME MODE Switching time indications to the

12-hour or 24-hour clock

SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID

set on the SHOT ID page is

superimposed. To carry out

superimposed recording, select

the SHOT ID number (1 to 4).

G GBRMGCYW

06/03 /1 5

139

Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Setting the Shot ID

You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters,

spaces, and symbols. When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is

set to BARS, DCC OFF, this shot ID is output with the

color bar signal. Four shot IDs are available, ID-1 to ID-4,

and you can select the shot ID to be recorded superimposed

on the color bars.

When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed

even if the color bar signal is output.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SHOT ID page of the OPERATION menu,

and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the ID (one of ID-1 to ID-4) you want to set, and

press the MENU knob.

x appears over the first character position in the

string, and characters can now be input.

Enter or change the characters.

When you are entering the shot ID for the first time, go

to step 2.

1Turn the MENU knob to move x to the character

which you want to change, then press the MENU

knob.

2Turn the MENU knob until x moves to the

character position that you want to select, then

press the MENU knob.

Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters.

When you have finished character inputting, turn the

MENU knob to move x over END, then press the

MENU knob.

This exits the character input mode, and returns to the

SHOT ID page.

To insert a space

In step 3 above, move x over INS, and press the MENU

knob. To cancel inserting a space, move x to RET, and

press the MENU knob.

To delete a character

In step 3 of “Setting the Shot ID” on page 139, move x

over DEL, and press the MENU knob. This deletes the

character under x in the shot ID row.

To cancel deleting the character, move x over RET, and

press the MENU knob.

Note

TO P? 13 SH OT I D

I D-1 : ?

I D-2 :

ss sssssssss s

I D-3 :

ss sssssssss s

I D-4 :

ss sssssssss s

I D-1 : ?

I D-2 :

ss sssssssss s

I D-3 :

ss sssssssss s

I D-4 :

ss sssssssss s

! #$%&' () *+ ,-./0 12 34 56 78

9: ;<=>? @A BC DEFGH IJ KL MN OP

QR STUVW XY Z[ ]abc de fg hi jk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

IN S DEL R ET ES C END

TO P 13 SH OT I D

ID-1 :?

I D-2 :

ss sssssssss s

I D-3 :

ss sssssssss s

I D-4 :

ss sssssssss s

! #$%&' () *+ ,-./0 12 34 56 78

9: ;<=>? @A BC DEFGH IJ KL MN OP

QR STUVW XY Z[ ]abc de fg hi jk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

IN S DEL R ET ES C END

TOP 13 SHOT ID

I D-1 : ?+

I D-2 :

ssssssssssss

I D-3 :

ssssssssssss

I D-4 :

ssssssssssss

! #$%&' () *+,-./012345678

9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

INS DEL RET ESC END

TOP 13 SHOT ID

Example: When entering the letter “+”

I D-1 : C M01 5

I D-2 :

ssssssssssss

ID-3 :

ssssssssssss

ID-4 :

ssssssssssss

! #$%&' () *+ ,-./0 12 34 56 78

9: ;<=>? @A BC DEFGH IJ KL MN OP

QR STUVW XY Z[ ]abc de fg hi jk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

INS D EL RE T E SC E ND

TO P 13 SH OT I D

I D-1 : C M 1 5

I D-2 :

ssssssssssss

ID-3 :

ssssssssssss

ID-4 :

ssssssssssss

! #$%&' () *+ ,-./0 12 34 56 78

9: ;<=>? @A BC DEFGH IJ KL MN OP

QR STUVW XY Z[ ]abc de fg hi jk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

INS DEL RET ESC END

TO P 13 SH OT I D

Move x over INS.

Space inserted.

140 Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

To cancel changing the shot ID

Before executing step 5 of “Setting the Shot ID” on page

139, move b to ESC, and press the MENU knob.

Showing the Status Display

You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on

the screen by showing the status display.

Items shown in the status display

The status display allows you to confirm the following

items related to the camera setting.

• FORMAT: Video recording format set on this unit

• WHITE: White balance color temperature

• ASSIGN: The setting of ASSIGN switch (1 to 4)

• TIME CODE: DF or NDF

• COMPONENT OUT: Output from the VIDEO OUT

connector

• AUDIO: Audio recording format set on this unit

• F.MIC: Front microphone setting

• CH1 to CH4: Knob adjustment for each audio channel

To show the status display

Flick the MENU switch to STATUS when the menu is not

displayed.

Adjustments and

Settings from Menus

Setting Gain Values for the GAIN

Switch Positions

You can set the gain values for the L, M, and H positions

of the GAIN switch, which switches the gain of the video

amplifier.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

You can set the following items on the GAIN SW

page.

Select the item corresponding to the switch position,

and press the MENU knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the gain value, and

press the MENU knob.

You can select from –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36,

42, and 48 dB.

To change the gain corresponding to another switch

position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Selecting the Output Signals

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

F330

FO RMAT : H D 5 0I SP

WH ITE : 3 200K

AS SIGN <1 >E ZMOD < 2> IR RCN

<3 > OFF < 4> OFF

TI ME CO DE : DF

CO MPONE NT O UT:HD Y Pb Pr

AU DIO : 16bi t 4c h

F, MIC : STER EO

CH 1: FR ON T CH2 : R EAR

CH 3: FR ON T CH4 : FR ONT

ON OFF

STATUS

The status display appears when

the MENU switch is flicked to

STATUS, and disappears when

the switch is released.

Item Description

GAIN LOW Sets the gain value corresponding

to the L position of the GAIN

switch.

GAIN MID Sets the gain value corresponding

to the M position of the GAIN

switch.

GAIN HIGH Sets the gain value corresponding

to the H position of the GAIN

switch.

GAIN TURBO When assigning TURBO to the

ASSIGN switch, sets the gain

value corresponding to the

ASSIGN switch !"##$%&'#$DR(*.

141

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Display the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select COMPONENT OUT, and press the MENU

knob.

Select one of the following, and press the MENU

knob.

AUTO: Switch between HD YPbPr and SD YPbPr,

according to the recording format. This applies to

both recording and playback.

HD YPbPr: Regardless of the recording format,

output HD YPbPr when recording. Output SD

YPbPr only when playing back DVCAM format.

SD YPbPr: Regardless of the recording format,

output SD YPbPr. This applies to both recording

and playback.

Display the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select VIDEO OUT SEL, and press the MENU knob

again.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

HD Y: Outputs the HD Y signal.

VBS: Outputs the analog composite video signal.

When VBS is selected, connect to the VIDEO IN

connector of the video monitor. This setting

allows you to save the power.

Setting the Color Temperature

Manually

You can manually adjust the value of the white balance by

setting the color temperature.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the WHITE page of the PAINT menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU

knob.

You can set the following items on the WHITE page.

The above table shows the adjustment of the white

balance of channel A. Items followed by are used

to adjust the white balance of channel B.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and

press the MENU knob.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the

desired items.

Specifying an Offset for the Auto

White Balance Setting

By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance,

you can make the picture warmer or colder.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the OFFSET WHITE page of the

OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU

knob.

You can set the following items in the OFFSET

WHITE page.

F330

F350

Item Description

COLOR TEMP

<A> Sets the color temperature for the

desired value. Adjust the value

while looking at the real image

because error tends to be bigger

for adjustment of high color

temperature.

C TEMP BAL <A> Adjusts the value more precisely

when the color temperature

adjustment through COLOR

TEMP is not satisfactory.

R GAIN <A> Changes only the value of R

GAIN.

B GAIN <A> Changes only the value of B

GAIN.

D5600K<A> Sets the color temperature to

approximately 5600K

142 Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Set the WHITE BAL switch to the channel (A or B)

that you want to set.

If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B, the

adjusted value is not reflected in the video output even

though you carry out the following operation.

Turn the MENU knob to perform the settings for each

item, and press the MENU knob.

If you want to set the other channel, go back to step 2.

Selecting Gamma Tables

You can select gamma curves from among five preset

patterns, for times when you want to achieve film-like

gradations and color reproduction and other effects.

Display the GAMMA SELECT page of the PAINT

menu, and then press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select the desired item and press the MENU knob.

The following settings are available.

When you select CINE1 to CINE4, the knee point is fixed

at a preset value and cannot be adjusted, even if you set

KNEE in the SWSTATUS page of the PAINT menu to

ON. DCC is also disabled.

Assigning Functions to ASSIGN

Switches

You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN

switches.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the ASSIGNABLE page on the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

You can assign functions by using the following items.

Item Description

OFFSET WHITE

<A> Selects whether the offset

adjusted on this page is added to

the white balance for channel A.

WARM-COOL <A> When OFFSET WHITE <A> is

ON, sets the offset for the white

balance of channel A, using the

color temperature. Adjust the

value while looking at the real

image because error tends to be

bigger for adjustment of high color

temperature.

COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely if

the adjustment by WARM-COOL

<A> is not satisfactory.

OFFSET WHITE

Selects whether the offset

adjusted on this page is added to

the white balance for channel B.

WARM-COOL When OFFSET WHITE is

ON, sets the offset for the white

balance of channel B, using the

color temperature. Adjust the

value while looking at the real

image because error tends to be

bigger for adjustment of high color

temperature.

COLOR FINE Adjusts the value more precisely if

the adjustment by WARM-COOL

is not satisfactory.

Note

Item Description

STD Standard setting (factory default

setting)

CINE1 This smoothes the contrasts in

darker sections and accentuates

gradation changes in brighter

sections, for a calm and quiet

effect.

CINE2 This gives almost the same

results as CINE1. Select this

when you want to obtain 100%

video signals for editing or other

purposes.

CINE3 This emphasizes the contrast

between light and dark more than

CINE1 and CINE2, and also

accentuates gradation changes

on the black side.

CINE4 This emphasizes the contrast in

dark section even more than

CINE3. Contrasts in darker

sections are weaker than STD,

and contrasts in brighter sections

are stronger.

Note

Item Description

ASSIGN SW <1> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1

switch.

ASSIGN SW <2> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2

switch.

ASSIGN SW <3> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 3

switch.

ASSIGN SW <4> Assigns the function to ASSIGN 4

switch.

143

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Select the desired switch (ASSIGN SW <1> to <4>),

and press the MENU knob.

The corresponding ASSIGN SW (1 to 4) SEL window

appears. You can assign one of the following functions

to the ASSIGN switch.

a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER 1 page

of the OPERATION menu, the ASSIGN switches allow you to turn

the display of all markers on or off.

b) Function assignable ASSIGN SW 1 and ASSIGN SW 2 switches

only

c) Abbreviation for Total Level Control System. A function to operate

the automatic gain control (AGC) and electronic shutter (AE) to

adapt to varying lighting conditions while shooting.

d) Use when shooting a subject at which a spotlight is directed.

e) Use when shooting a backlit subject.

Select the desired function, and press the MENU knob.

The function is assigned, and the ASSIGNABLE page

appears again.

Selecting the Lens File

You can change the lens file according to the lens in use.

Display the LENS FILE menu of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

The LENS FILE page shows the name and the iris

setting value of the lens currently selected.

Select LENS AUTO RECALL, and press the MENU

knob.

Select ON, and press the MENU knob.

Selecting the Aspect Ratio

Switching the aspect ratio for DVCAM

recording

You can switch the aspect ratio for DVCAM recording.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the FORMAT menu of the USER

(OPERATION) menu, and press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select ASPECT RATIO (DV), and press the MENU

knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio

(16:9/4:3), and press the MENU knob.

Function Description

OFF Assigns no function.

MARKER Assigns the function to turn the

display of all markers on or off. a)

RETAKE Delete the last recorded clip.

ATW Assigns the function to turn ATW

on or off.

LENS RET Assigns the recording review

function.

REC SWITCH Assigns the recording start/stop

function.

TURBO SWITCH Assigns the turbo gain value set

for GAIN TURBO !"##$%&'#$DRE*.

FREEZE MIX Assigns the function to output the

freeze image and camera input

alternately, to allow frame

alignment (automatic switching).

SHOT MARK1 Assigns the shot mark 1 function.

SHOT MARK2 Assigns the shot mark 2 function.

EZ MODE b) Assigns EZ mode ON/OFF

switching.

EZ FOCUS b) Assigns EZ focus ON/OFF

switching.

SKIN DETAIL ON/

OFF b)

Assigns SKIN DETAIL ON/OFF

switching.

SPOT LIGHT b) Auto iris spotlight mode d)

BACK LIGHT b) Auto iris backlight mode e)

TLCS b), c) TLCS ON/OFF

IR REMOTE b) Infrared remote commander ON/

OFF

PICTURE CACHE Assigns Picture Cache function

ON/OFF switching.

TO P F 04 LE NS F ILE 1

L ENS F IL E RECAL L: EX EC

L ENS F IL E STORE : EX EC

F .ID [C ]V CL-71 9B XS

S OURCE : ----- -- -

L ENS N O OF FSET : EX EC

I RIS G AI N :

L ENS A UT O RECAL L: ON

< LENS IN FO RMATI ON >

L .ID: VC L- 719BX S

L .MF: Ca nn on

Lens file number

Lens name and iris

setting value

TO P 0 01 FO RM AT

S YSTEM : 6 0I

R EC FO RM AT : D VC AM

B IT RA TE ( HD) : SP

A UDIO CH ( HD) : 4 ch

A SPECT R AT IO(DV ): 16 :9

C OUNTR Y : NTS C( J) AR EA

144 Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

Setting the aspect ratio for SD playback in

HD mode

When outputting SD video down-converted from HD

video, you can switch the aspect ratio.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION

menu, and press the MENU knob.

Select HDtSD(PLAY BACK), and press the MENU

knob.

Turn the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio

(16:9/4:3), and press the MENU knob.

The HD analog composite output from the PDW-F330 and

the HDSDI output from the PDW-F350 are always of the

aspect ratio of 16:9.

To display the aspect ratio of 16:9 on the

viewfinder screen

When the recording format is DVCAM and the aspect ratio

is 16:9, you can display the indication “16:9” on the

viewfinder screen by setting DISP 16:9 on the VF DISP 1

page of the OPERATION menu to ON.

For details, see “Selecting the Display Items” on page

136.

About the CCD Scan Mode

This unit allows you to record in progressive scan mode as

well as in interlace scan mode. You can select the scan

mode from the following modes using the FORMAT page

of the OPERATION menu.

• 60i (interlace scan) mode

• 30P (progressive scan) mode

• 23.98P mode

Pulldown method for DVCAM format recording in 23.98P mode

DVCAM video signals recorded in 23.98P mode are 2-3

pulled down, and recorded on a disc as 60i signals.

Note

DF/NDF Purpose Notes

DF Obtain an effect similar

to that obtained by

23.98P shooting while

maintaining interlace

scan mode.

–

NDF Re-convert to 23.98P

with nonlinear editing

software (NLE).

(Select according to

your NLE.)

• You can start recording at frame 0 or frame 5 of the timecode. Therefore, when setting

the timecode or recording in backspace editing mode, the value of the least significant

digit is limited to 0 or 5.

• There will be noise on the recorded image if you change the operating mode for the

internal timecode generator using the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch on the side control

panel while recording.

• The video and audio signal and timecode output via i.LINK may not be consecutive

when recording starts.

Notes on 2-3 pulldown

• When the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch on the side control panel is set to CLOCK,

this unit operates in DF mode. The synchronization of the timecode and the pulled-

down picture is disabled.

• When drop-frame timecode is input via the TC IN connector, this unit operates in DF

mode and synchronization of the pulled-down picture and the timecode is disabled.

This setting will continue in effect until the timecode setting (F-RUN/R-RUN or DF/NDF)

is changed.

145

Adjustments and Settings from Menus

Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings

2-3 pulldown in 23.98P mode

A O

A ( O + E ) B ( O + E ) C ( O + E ) D ( O + E ) A ( O + E )

A E B O B E B O C E C O D E D O D E A O A E

O: Odd E: Even

After reading from the CCDs in 23.98 frames per second, a pulldown

conversion is carried out to the 30 frames (29.97 frames per second)

of the normal progressive scan mode.

1/29.97 seconds

1/23.98 seconds

CCD output

Video output signal

Chapter6

146 Saving and Loading User Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

Saving and Loading the

User Setting Data

Saving and Loading User

Files

The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory Stick” slot,

which enables you to save the settings in the USER menu

as a user file onto the “Memory Stick”. You can load these

files from the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a

particular setting configuration. In addition to user files,

you can save scene files, lens files and ALL files in a

“Memory Stick”.

When a menu is displayed, you can set up the camcorder

so that inserting a “Memory Stick” automatically jumps to

the appropriate file-related menu page.

For details about scene files, see “Saving and Loading

Scene Files” on page 150.

For details about lens files and ALL files, refer to “Menu

List” on page 111.

Handling the “Memory Stick”

The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or removed from

the camcorder with the power turned on or off.

“Memory Stick” usable with this

camcorder

With this camcorder, you can use a “Memory Stick” whose

capacity does not exceed 128 MB.

For details, see “About a “Memory Stick”” on page 174.

To insert a “Memory Stick”

Open the “Memory Stick” slot cover on the back of the

camcorder.

Insert the “Memory Stick” with its label side facing the

“Memory Stick” logo on the camcorder.

If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some

resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may be

turned around or upside down. Do not force the “Memory

Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of the notch and

arrow on the “Memory Stick” before inserting the

“Memory Stick”, and then try inserting it again.

To remove the “Memory Stick”

Check that the access indicator is not lit, then gently

press in the “Memory Stick” once and release.

The “Memory Stick” pops out.

Note

Label side of “Memory Stick”

147

Saving and Loading User Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

Pull the “Memory Stick” towards you to withdraw it

from the slot.

Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the access

indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the “Memory

Stick”.

To protect saved data

To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data, slide

the LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick” right to the write

protect position.

It is now impossible to write or delete data on the

“Memory Stick”. If you try to do so, the message

“MEMORY STICK LOCKED” appears and the data

cannot be overwritten or deleted.

Notes on using and storing the “Memory

Stick”

To use and store the “Memory Stick”, note the following

points.

• Avoid touching the connector of the “Memory Stick” or

contacting it with a metal object.

• When attaching a label to the “Memory Stick”, use only

the label supplied for the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not drop, bend, or submit the “Memory Stick” to

external shock.

• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.

• Avoid getting liquids on the “Memory Stick”.

• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in a location

subject to:

- extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a

car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun, or a place

near a heater.

- direct sunlight.

• When storing and carrying the “Memory Stick”, keep it

in its original case to ensure protection of important data.

• Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.

Format the “Memory Stick” on the MEMORY STICK

page of the FILE menu.

Saving USER Menu Data (User File)

to the “Memory Stick”

USER menu settings stored in the camcorder as user files

can be saved to the “Memory Stick”.

You can save up to 100 user files to the “Memory Stick”.

Insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot,

then proceed as follows.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

To set a file ID for the data to be saved

Set the file ID before going to step 2.

For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the file

ID” on page 148.

Select USER FILE SAVE, and press the MENU knob.

The USER SAVE page appears.

Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used to save

user files to the “Memory Stick”. Each page can hold

up to five files.

Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains

the desired file number appears, and press the MENU

knob.

Note

Gently press in and release.

Check that the access

indicator is not lit.

U SER F IL E LOAD : EX EC

U SER F IL E SAVE : EX EC

F .ID :

ss sssssssss sssss

U SER P RE SE T : EX EC

TO P F 01 US ER F ILE

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

001.NEW FILE

002.NEW FILE

003.NEW FILE

004.NEW FILE

005.NEW FILE

ESC?P00 USER SAVE

148 Saving and Loading User Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

Select the desired file number, and press the MENU

knob.

The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.

To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU

knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to

NO.

The access indicator lights. When the saving is

completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears and

the access indicator goes off.

If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted, the message

“NO MEMORY STICK” will appear. Insert a

“Memory Stick”, and carry out the operation once

again.

If you select a file number where data has already

been saved

The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”

appears.

• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob leaving

b pointing to NO.

• To overwrite, select YES and press the MENU knob.

You can select the information displayed on each

USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.

For details, see “To select the file information items to

be displayed” on page 149.

About the USER menu settings to be saved in the

“Memory Stick”

Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are

saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file.

If data cannot be saved

If one of the following error messages appears during or

after the save operation, then the data was not saved.

To set the file ID

Before data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, it is useful to set

a file ID for the “Memory Stick” to identify it.

When data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, the file ID is

saved to the “Memory Stick” together with the data.

Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick”.

Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select F. ID, and press the MENU knob.

A character table appears.

Follow steps 3 and 4 described in “Setting the Shot

ID” on page 139 to enter characters.

When you have finished entering the file ID, turn the

MENU knob to move x to END, and press the MENU

knob.

The entered file ID is now displayed.

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.NE W FI LE

0 02.NE W FI LE

0 03.NE W FI LE

0 04.NE W FI LE

0 05.NE W FI LE

ES C P 00 US ER S AVE

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.NE W FI LE

0 02.NE W FI LE

0 03.NE W FI LE

0 04.NE W FI LE

0 05.NE W FI LE

ES CP0 0 USE R SA VE

SAVE O K? Y ES N O

If a file number is

followed by “NEW

FILE”, this means

that the file is empty.

If data is stored in the

file, the file number is

followed by the file

name.

Error message Cause Action

NO MEMORY

STICK (flashing) No “Memory Stick”

is inserted. Insert or reinsert

the “Memory

Stick”.

MEMORY STICK

LOCKED The LOCK switch

on the “Memory

Stick” is set to the

write protect

position.

Set the LOCK

switch to the write

enable position.

MEMORY STICK

ERROR (flashing) Circuit or “Memory

Stick” fault. Recheck and

consult your Sony

dealer.

Note

U SER F IL E LOAD : E XEC

U SER F IL E SAVE : E XEC

F .ID : ?

i #$%&' () *+ ,-./0 12 34 56 78

9: ;<=>? @A BC DEFGH IJ KL MN OP

QR STUVW XY Z[ ]abc de fg hi jk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

IN S DEL R ET ES C END

TO P F 01 US ER F ILE

149

Saving and Loading User Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

After setting the file ID, carry out the procedure from

step 2 in “Saving USER Menu Data (User File) to the

“Memory Stick”” on page 147.

The set file ID is saved in the “Memory Stick” with the

data.

To select the file information items to be

displayed

You can select the file information items to be displayed

on the USER FILE SAVE page and USER FILE LOAD

page (P00 to P19), that are the pages used to save and call

up the data to and from “Memory Stick”.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display a USER FILE LOAD page or USER FILE

SAVE page of the USER FILE menu, and press the

MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Press the MENU knob, then select the DISPLAY

MODE, and press the MENU knob.

Select the desired type of file information (see the

following table), and press the MENU knob.

Loading Saved Data From a

“Memory Stick”

The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the

data saved in the camcorder.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select USER FILE LOAD, and press the MENU knob.

The P00 USER LOAD page appears.

Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains

the desired file appears, then press the MENU knob.

Press the MENU knob. Then select the desired file

number, and press the MENU knob.

The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.

To carry out the load, select YES and press the MENU

knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to

NO.

The access indicator lights.

When the load is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes

off.

The USER FILE page appears again.

If data cannot be loaded

If one of the following error messages appears during or

after the load operation, then the data was not loaded.

Display type Description

ALL File ID (10 characters) and date

(year/month/day)

F.ID File ID (16 characters)

DATE Date saved (year/month/day/

hours/minutes/seconds)

MODEL Information on the model

Note

U SER F IL E LOAD : EX EC

U SER F IL E SAVE : EX EC

F .ID : I D- 001

U SER P RE SE T : EX EC

TO P F 01 US ER F ILE

File ID that has been set appears.

Error message Cause Action

NO MEMORY

STICK (flashing) No “Memory Stick”

is inserted. Insert or reinsert

the “Memory

Stick”.

MEMORY STICK

ERROR (flashing) Circuit or “Memory

Stick” fault. Recheck, and

consult your Sony

dealer.

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.US ER 1 J AN /0 5/ 06

0 02.US ER 2 J AN /1 5/ 06

0 03.NO F IL E

0 04.US ER 4 F EB /0 5/ 06

0 05.US ER 5 F EB /2 0/ 06

TO P?P 00 US ER L OAD

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.US ER 1 J AN /0 5/ 06

0 02.US ER 2 J AN /1 5/ 06

0 03.NO F IL E

0 04.US ER 4 F EB /0 5/ 06

0 05.US ER 5 F EB /2 0/ 06

TO P P 00 US ER L OAD

LOAD O K? Y ES N O

150 Saving and Loading Scene Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

Saving and Loading

Scene Files

You can save various settings for shooting a particular

scene as a scene file. Loading the scene file, you can

quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene.

You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder

memory and up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick”.

You can also load data from the “Memory Stick” into the

camcorder memory.

Data that can be saved in a scene file

You can save the following data in a scene file:

• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu

• Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and

ECS mode

For details of the PAINT menu, refer to “PAINT menu” on

page 118.

Saving a Scene File

To save a scene file to the “Memory Stick”, insert the

“Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot before

starting the operation.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operation, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

To set a file ID for the data to be saved

Set the file ID before going to step 2.

For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the file

ID” on page 148.

Select SCENE STORE, and press the MENU knob.

The SCENE STORE page appears.

FILE ERROR

(flashing) The “Memory

Stick” contains

data that cannot be

loaded into this

camcorder.

Data saved to a

“Memory Stick”

using a camcorder

whose model is

not the same as

this camcorder

cannot be loaded

into this

camcorder.

Error message Cause Action

1 :STANDARD

2 :STANDARD

3 :STANDARD

4 :STANDARD

5 :STANDARD

ST ANDAR D

S CENE RE CA LL : EX EC

S CENE ST OR E : EX EC

F .ID: ST AN DARD

TO P F 04 SC EN E FILE

151

Saving and Loading Scene Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

Press the MENU knob, then select the desired file

number, and press the MENU knob again.

The file to be saved is selected.

When no “Memory Stick” is inserted

Select the desired memory number, and press the

MENU knob.

When the save is completed, the SCENE FILE page

appears again.

When you select a file number where data has

already been saved

The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”

appears.

• To cancel the overwriting, press the MENU knob

leaving b positioning to NO.

• To overwrite, select YES and press the MENU knob.

When a “Memory Stick” is inserted

You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save

scene files in the “Memory Stick”. Each page can hold

up to five files.

1Turn the MENU knob until the page which

contains the desired file appears, then press the

MENU knob.

2Select the desired file number, and press the

MENU knob.

The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears.

3To carry out the storing, select YES and press the

MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b

pointing to NO.

You can select the file information items to be

displayed on each page of SCENE STORE and

SCENE RECALL.

For details, see “To select the file information items to

be displayed” on page 149.

To save scene files stored in the

camcorder memory to the “Memory Stick”

The five scene files stored in the camcorder memory can

be saved to the “Memory Stick” all in a single operation.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select SCENE STORE, and press the MENU knob.

Select the desired SCENE STORE page, and press the

MENU knob.

Select 5FILE SAVE b MEM1-5, and press the MENU

knob.

The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears.

To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU

knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to

NO.

When the save is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears.

If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3, those

files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

M EM-01 :S TA NDARD

M EM-02 :S TA NDARD

M EM-03 :S TA NDARD

M EM-04 :S TA NDARD

M EM-05 :S TA NDARD

ES C?P 00 SC EN E STORE

DISPLAY MODE : ALL

001.SCENE1 FEB/05/02

0 02.ST AN DA RD

0 03.ST AN DA RD

0 04.ST AN DA RD

0 05.ST AN DA RD

***.5FILE SAVE MEM1-5

ES C P 01 SC EN E STORE

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.SC EN E1 F EB /0 5/ 02

0 02.ST AN DA RD

0 03.ST AN DA RD

0 04.ST AN DA RD

0 05.ST AN DA RD

* **.5F IL E SAVE ME M1 -5

ES C P 01 SC EN E STORE

STOR E OK ? Y ES N O

Note

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.SC EN E1 F EB /0 5/ 02

0 02.SC EN E2 F EB /0 6/ 02

0 03.NO F IL E

0 04.SC EN E4 F EB /0 8/ 02

0 05.SC EN E5 F EB /0 8/ 02

* **.5F IL E SAVE ME M1 -5

ES C P 01 SC EN E STORE

DISPLAY MODE : ALL

001.SCENE1

002.SCENE2

0 03.NO F IL E

004.SCENE4

005.SCENE5

***.5FILE SAVE MEM1-5

ESC P01 SCENE STORE

STORE OK? YES NO

152 Saving and Loading Scene Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced

by the above procedure.

To set the file ID

Before the data is saved as a scene file, it is useful to set a

file ID to identify it. The set file ID is saved together with

the data.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select F. ID, and press the MENU knob.

A character table appears.

Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob

until x moves to the character position that you want

to select, and press the MENU knob.

Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters.

Set the file ID before saving the scene file. Otherwise,

the file ID is not saved with the other data.

When you have finished character inputting, turn the

MENU knob to move x over END, and press the

MENU knob.

The file ID is set, and the SCENE FILE page appears

again.

Carry out the procedure from step 2 in “Saving a

Scene File” on page 150. The set file ID is saved

together with the data.

To select the file information items to be

displayed

You can select the items of file information to be displayed

on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to P20) or the SCENE

RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or

loading data from a “Memory Stick”.

For details to select the item, “To select the file

information items to be displayed” on page 149.

Loading Scene Files

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

To load the scene file stored in the camcorder, select

the desired file number, and press the MENU knob.

s on the left of the file number changes to x. The

camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file.

To cancel the selected scene file

Turn the MENU knob to move b to x, and press the

MENU knob. x changes to s. The camcorder returns

to the settings before selecting this scene file.

To load a scene file saved in the “Memory Stick”

1Select SCENE RECALL, and press the MENU

knob.

The SCENE RECALL page appears.

Note

! #$%&' () *+ ,-./0 12 34 56 78

9: ;<=>? @A BC DEFGH IJ KL MN OP

QR STUVW XY Z[ ]abc de fg hi jk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

IN S DEL R ET E SC E ND

sSTAN DA RD

S CENE RE CA LL : EX EC

S CENE ST OR E : EX EC

F.ID :STA NDARD

TO P F 04 SC EN E FILE

Example: When entering the letter “+”

! #$%&' () *+, -./01 23 45 67 8

9: ;<=>? @A BC DEFGH IJ KL MN OP

QR STUVW XY Z[ ]abc de fg hi jk

lm nopqr st uv wxyz~

IN S DEL R ET E SC E ND

sSTAN DA RD

S CENE RE CA LL : EX EC

S CENE ST OR E : EX EC

F.ID :+TANDARD

TO P F 04 SC EN E FILE

1 :ST AN DA RD

2 :ST AN DA RD

3 :ST AN DA RD

4 :ST AN DA RD

5 :ST AN DA RD

ST ANDAR D

S CENE RE CA LL : EX EC

S CENE ST OR E : EX EC

F .ID: SC EN E21

TO P 04 SC EN E FILE

File ID

1 :SC EN E 25

2 :SC EN E 26

3 :SC EN E 27

4 :SC EN E 28

5 :NO F IL E

STANDARD

S CENE RE CA LL : EX EC

S CENE ST OR E : EX EC

F .ID : SC EN E21

TO P F 04 SC EN E FILE

153

Saving and Loading Scene Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

2Turn the MENU knob until the page which

contains the desired file appears.

3Press the MENU knob, then turn the MENU knob

to move b to the desired file number, and press the

MENU knob.

The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO”

appears.

To carry out the recall, select YES and press the

MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to

NO.

When the loading is completed, the message

“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is set up

according to the loaded scene file. If no file is present

with a particular file number, this is shown as “NO

FILE”.

To load scene files from the “Memory

Stick” into the camcorder memory

You can load up to five scene files stored in the “Memory

Stick” into the camcorder memory all in a single operation.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select SCENE RECALL, and press the MENU knob.

The SCENE RECALL page appears.

Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL

page which contains the desired scene files appears.

Press the MENU knob. Then select 5FILE LOAD B

MEM 1-5, and press the MENU knob.

The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO” appears.

To carry out the recall, select YES and press the

MENU knob.

To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to

NO.

When loading is complete, the message

“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes

off.

• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”

overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.

• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory

when the “Memory Stick” is inserted, return to the P00

SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in

the camcorder memory.

• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO

FILE”), an existing file of the same number is

unaffected. In the example shown in step 4, MEM(3) is

not overwritten.

Resetting the Settings of the

Camcorder to the Standard Settings

You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the standard

settings.

(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the

MENU knob to move the b mark to the desired item.)

Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and

press the MENU knob.

For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Select STANDARD, and press the MENU knob.

DISPLAY MODE : F.ID

MEM-1:STANDARD

MEM-2:STANDARD

MEM-3:STANDARD

MEM-4:STANDARD

M EM-5: NO F ILE

ES C?P 00 SC EN E RECAL L

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.SC EN E1

0 02.SC EN E2

0 03.NO F IL E

0 04.SC EN E4

0 05.SC EN E5

* **.5F IL E LOAD ME M1 -5

ES C P 01 SC EN E RECAL L

RECA LL O K? Y ES N O

Notes

D ISPLA Y MO DE : A LL

0 01.SC EN E1

0 02.SC EN E2

0 03.NO F IL E

0 04.SC EN E4

0 05.SC EN E5

* **.5F IL E LOAD ME M1 -5

ES C P 01 SC EN E RECAL L

RECA LL O K? Y ES N O

154 Saving and Loading Scene Files

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the User Setting Data

s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x.

When x changes to s once again, the settings of the

camcorder are reset to the settings.

If you press the MENU knob again while x is

displayed, the operation is cancelled and the

camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD

was selected.

1 :SC EN E 25

2 :SC EN E 26

3 :SC EN E 27

4 :SC EN E 28

5 :NO F IL E

ST ANDAR D

S CENE RE CA LL : EX EC

S CENE ST OR E : EX EC

F .ID : SC EN E2

TO P F 04 SC EN E FILE

155

Overview

Chapter

Chapter 7 File Operation

File Operation

Overview

A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used

to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data

files, such as video and audio data files.

To connect a remote computer, use FAM (file access

mode) for the computer connection.

Directory Structure

The following figure shows the directory structure of discs

visible to a remote computer.

This structure is not the same as the actual structure

recorded on the disc.

a) Root directory

b) Only when sub item “NAMING FORM” on the FILE NAMING page of

the OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”.

Note

root a)

INDEX.XML

ALIAS.XML b)

Clip

Edit

Sub

General

DISCMETA.XML

MEDIAPRO.XML

C0001.MXF

C0001M01.XML

C0002.MXF

C0002M01.XML

C0003.MXF

C0003M01.XML

E0001E01.SMI

E0001M01.XML

E0002E01.SMI

E0002M01.XML

C0001S01.MXF

C0002S01.MXF

C0003S01.MXF

156 Overview

Chapter 7 File Operation

File Operation Restrictions

This section explains which operations are possible on

files stored in each directory.

When required, the following operation tables distinguish

reading and writing from partial reading and writing.

Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the end of

the file.

Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the file.

Write: Write data sequentially from the start to the end of

the file.

Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.

Root directory

a) Only when sub item “NAMING FORM” on the FILE NAMING page of

the OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”.

b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. • Directories cannot be created in the root directory.

• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub, and

General) cannot be deleted or renamed.

Clip directory

a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the unit can handle files with user-

defined names in the “C*” part.

b) Possible with firmware version 1.5 and higher.

c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in a format matching

the format (system frequency) and recording format (MPEG HD/DVCAM

and number of audio channels) of the recorded sections of the disc, and

which can be overwritten by XDCAM.

d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording. With

firmware version 1.1 and lower, only the most recently recorded clip may

be deleted. With firmware version 1.5 and higher, any clip may be selected

and deleted.

e) Only files which can be written by XDCAM

f) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “C*” part of a C*.MXF

file name is changed, a C*M01.XML file with the same name in the “C*”

part is also changed automatically.

g) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file with the same name

in the “C*” part is created automatically.

h) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file with the same name

in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.

File name Content Operations

Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create Delete

INDEX.XML Contains data for management

of the material on the disc. Yes No No No No

ALIAS.XML a) Contains conversion tables for

assigning user-defined names

to clips and clip lists.

Yes No No No No

DISCMETA.XML Contains metadata to indicate

the disc properties. Yes Yes b) No No No

MEDIAPRO.XML Contains a list of material on

the disc, basic properties,

related information, and

information about access

methods.

Yes No No No No

Other files Files other than the above – No – No –

Notes

File name Content Operations

Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create Delete

C*.MXF a) Clip file created by recording

(MXF file)

*: 0001 to 9999

Yes No No b) Yes c) Yes d)

C*M01.XML a) Metadata file generated

automatically when C*.MXF

file is created.

*: 0001 to 9999

Yes Yes e) No f) No g) No h)

Other files Files other than the above – No – No –

157

Overview

Chapter 7 File Operation

• Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.

• When the following operations, supported by version 1.5

and higher XDCAM devices, are carried out on a disc,

then it becomes impossible for version 1.4 and lower

XDCAM devices to record new clips or delete existing

clips on that disc. (The only possible operations are

playback and disc formatting.)

- Writing of clips with user-defined names

- Deletion of clips (except the last recorded clip)

- Locking of clips

• If you attempt to write a C*.MXF file which does not

meet the conditions specified as remark c) on this table

via a FAM connection, a Windows error message

appears to the effect that the file or directory is corrupt

and cannot be read.

Edit directory

a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the “E*” part can be changed to a

user-defined name.

b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial writing is not

possible.

c) Possible with firmware version 1.5 and higher.

d) Only files which can be written by XDCAM

e) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording.

f) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “E*” part of a *E01.SMI

is changed, an E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is

also changed automatically.

g) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML file with the same

name in the “E*” part is also generated automatically.

h) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML file with the same

name in the “E*” part is also deleted automatically.

Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.

Sub directory

a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the “C*” part can be changed to any

name.

b) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “C*” part of a C*.MXF

file name is changed, a C*S01. MXF file with the same name in the “C*”

part is generated automatically.

c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.XML file with the same name in

the “C*” part is generated automatically.

d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.XML file with the same name

in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.

Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.

General directory

Notes

File name Content Operations

Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create Delete

E*E01.SMI a) Clip list file

*: 0001 to 0099 Yes Yes b) No c) Yes d) Yes e)

E*M01.XML a) Metadata file generated

automatically when E*E01.SMI

file is created.

*: 0001 to 0099

Yes Yes b) No f) No g) No h)

Other files Files other than the above – No – No –

Note

File name Content Operations

Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create Delete

C*S01.MXF a) Proxy AV data (MXF) file

generated automatically when

a C*.MXF file is created.

*: 0001 to 4999

Yes No No b) No c) No d)

Other files Files other than the above – No – No –

Note

File name Content Operations

Read/Partial read Write/Partial write Rename Create Delete

Any file – Yes Yes Yes a) Yes Yes b)

158 File Access Mode File Operations

Chapter 7 File Operation

a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length. (Depending on the

character type, file names (including extension) may be limited to 21

characters.)

b) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording.

The following directory operations are possible in the

General directory.

• Directory creation (up to 64 levels, including the

General directory)

• Deletion and renaming of directories

• The maximum number of files that can be created on one

disc, including directories, is 5000.

• File names and directory names can use letters, numbers,

and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8) character

set.

However, the following control characters and

symbols 1) cannot be used.

- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F

- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |

1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4. However, the following

character codes cannot be used by FAM connections. U+010000,

U+020000, U+030000, U+040000, U+050000, U+060000, 0U+70000,

U+080000, U+090000, U+0A0000, U+0B0000, U+0C0000, U+0D0000,

U+0E0000, U+0F0000, U+100000

File Access Mode File

Operations

File access mode operating environment

Operating system requirements for file operations by file

access mode (called FAM below) are as follows.

•Computer operating system: Microsoft Windows

2000 Service Pack 4 or higher, or Microsoft

Windows XP

Preparations

Install the FAM driver on the remote computer.

To install the FAM driver

Insert the supplied CD-ROM (PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing

Software) in the CD-ROM drive of the computer and

execute the Setup.exe file, then follow the installation

instructions.

For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD-

ROM disc.

Use Version 1.4 or higher of the FAM driver. The FAM

driver on the supplied CD-ROM is Version 1.4 or higher.

If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer,

check the version.

To check the version, click “Add or Remove

Programs”(Windows XP) or “Add/Remove Programs”

(Windows 2000), select “ProDisc”, and then click “Click

here for support information”.

Making FAM connections

Proceed as follows.

If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put the unit into the

following state.

• Recording, playback, search and other disc

operations: Stopped

• THUMBNAIL indicator (see page 21): Off

• Disc access by DELETE LAST CLIP, DELETE

ALL CLIPS, or QUICK FORMAT on the DISC

page of the OPERATION menu, and so on: Stopped

• Interval Rec function: Off

• MENU switch: OFF

• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear

Connect the DV IN/OUT S400 connector on this

unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the

remote computer, using an i.LINK cable.

Notes

Note

159

File Access Mode File Operations

Chapter 7 File Operation

Windows recognizes this unit as a removable disc, and

displays one of the following icons on the remote

computer’s task bar:

• Windows 2000:

• Windows XP:

The remote computer is now able to perform file

operations when a disc is inserted into this unit.

Operation limitations during FAM connections

• With the exception of the EJECT button, recording

buttons and playback control buttons are disabled.

• The VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from devices

connected to the REMOTE connector (8-pin) and DV

IN/OUT S400 (i.LINK) connector.

• There is no signal output from this unit while video is

being input to this unit from external equipment.

Operating on files

Proceed as follows.

Start Explorer.

Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit.

(The drive letter will differ depending on the number

of other peripherals connected to the remote

computer.)

Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc

loaded in this unit.

You can operate in the same way that you operate on

local drives and files on network computers.

• If you power this unit off during an FAM

connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded.

• All file operations are not possible for some types of

files.

For details, see “File Operation Restrictions” on

page 156.

To eject discs from a remote computer

Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer, and

select Eject from the menu which appears.

Exiting file operations

Proceed as follows.

Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3.

Do one of the following on the or icon

displayed in the remote computer’s taskbar.

• Double click.

• Right click, and select one of the following

commands from the menu which appears.

-Windows 2000: Unplug or Eject Hardware

-Windows XP: Safely Remove Hardware

The Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box (Windows

2000) or Safely Remove Hardware dialog box

(Windows XP) appears.

Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-F330 (or PDW-F350)

IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” and click Stop.

The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears.

Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-F330 (or PDW-F350)

IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” and click OK.

In Windows 2000, a confirmation message appears.

In Windows XP, “Sony XDCAM PDW-F330 (or

PDW-F350) IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” is deleted from

the list of hardware devices.

This unit can now resume normal operations. (The

limitations described in “Operation limitations during

FAM connections” on page 159 no longer apply.)

Disconnect the i.LINK cable as required.

Reconnecting

To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one of the

following, depending on whether an i.LINK cable is

connected.

i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit and a

remote computer with an i.LINK cable.

i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the i.LINK cable

from either this unit or the remote computer, wait for

at least 10 seconds, and then reconnect the

disconnected cable.

The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is

connected: Power the unit on.

Notes

File data

Transfer of files

PDW-F330/F330P/

F350/F350P Laptop computer, etc.

i.LINK cable (not supplied)

Note

160 Important Notes on Operation

Appendix

Important Notes on

Operation

Use and Storage

Do not subject the unit to severe shocks

The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body

warped.

Do not cover the unit while operating

Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can cause

excessive internal heat build-up.

After use

Always turn off the POWER switch.

Before storing the camcorder for a long period

Remove the battery pack.

Shipping

• Remove the disc before transporting the unit.

• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other

transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of

the unit.

Care of the unit

Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or

optical filters using a blower.

If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth.

In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in a little neutral

detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such

as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or

other damage to the finish of the unit.

In the event of operating problems

If you should experience problems with the unit, contact

your Sony dealer.

Use and storage locations

Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the

unit in the following places.

• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature range:

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F))

Remember that in summer in warm climates the

temperature inside a car with the windows closed can

easily exceed 50°C (122°F).

• In damp or dusty locations

• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain

• Locations subject to violent vibration

• Near strong magnetic fields

• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong

electromagnetic fields.

• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods

To prevent electromagnetic interference from

portable communications devices

The use of portable telephones and other communications

devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and

interference with audio and video signals.

It is recommended that the portable communications

devices near this unit be powered off.

Note on laser beams

Laser beams may damage the CCDs.

If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful

not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the

camera.

Use at a high temperature

If the unit is used at a high temperature, white flecks may

appear on the screen.

Fitting the zoom lens

It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise damage

may result. Be sure to refer to the section “Mounting the

Lens” on page 40.

Viewfinder

• Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing directly

at the sun.

The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays and

melt the interior of the viewfinder.

• Do not use the viewfinder close to strong magnetic

fields. This can cause picture distortion.

161

Important Notes on Operation

Appendix

About the LCD panels

LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high-

precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of

99.99% or higher. However, very rarely, one or more

pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in

white, red, blue, or green.

This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such pixels have

no effect on the recorded data, and the unit may be used

with confidence even if they are present.

Phenomena Specific to CCD Image

Sensors

The following phenomena that may appear in images are

specific to CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensors.

They do not indicate malfunctions.

White flecks

Although the CCD image sensors are produced with high-

precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated

on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.

This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and

is not a malfunction.

The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following

cases:

• when operating at a high environmental temperature

• when you have raised the master gain (sensitivity)

• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode

This problem may be alleviated by automatic black

balance adjustment (see page 59).

Vertical smear

When an extremely bright object, such as a strong spotlight

or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails may be produced

on the screen, or the image may be distorted.

Aliasing

When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may

appear jagged or flicker.

Condensation

If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a

warm place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may

form on the optical pickup. Then, if the camcorder is

operated in this state, recording and playback may not be

performed properly.

Do the following to prevent this from happening.

• When you move or operate the camcorder in an

environment where condensation may form, be sure to

insert a disc in advance and close the disc compartment

lid.

• Whenever you turn on the POWER switch, check that

the HUMID indicator does not appear on the LCD

monitor. If it appears, wait until it disappears before

inserting a disc.

Vertical tails shown on the

image.

Monitor screen

Bright object (e.g. strong

spotlight, strong reflected

light, flashlight, the sun)

162 Maintenance

Appendix

Maintenance

Testing the Camcorder Before

Shooting

Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for

a shooting session, preferably by operating the camcorder

together with a color video monitor.

Preparations for testing

Attach a fully charged battery pack.

Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the

HUMID indicator does not appear and that the

remaining battery capacity indicator shows at least

five segments.

• If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until it

disappears (see page 161).

• If the remaining battery capacity indicator does not

show at least five segments, replace the battery pack

with a fully charged one.

Check that there are no obstructions near the disc

compartment, and then press the EJECT button to

open the disc compartment lid.

After confirming that the disc is not write-protected,

load the disc and close the disc compartment lid.

Testing the Camera

Set the switches and selectors as follows.

Testing the viewfinder

Adjust the position of the viewfinder.

Check that the color bars are displayed on the

viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT,

CONTRAST, and PEAKING controls to give the best

color bar display.

Check the following points in the listed order.

• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.

• Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page

changes to the next page.

• Press the MENU knob and check that settings of

each item of the selected page are displayed.

• Turn the MENU knob and check that the b mark

moves within the page.

• Press the MENU knob and check that the b mark

placed before the item changes to a z mark and the

z mark placed before the setting of the item changes

to a ? mark.

• Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of

the selected item changes.

Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change

the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3

and 4.

Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder

screen displays the correct numbers.

Move the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL

repeatedly, and check that the shutter setting changes

on the viewfinder screen.

Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the

camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen.

Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT, and

check that when sound is input to a microphone

connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the

camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on the

viewfinder screen.

Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF

makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the

viewfinder screen.

The results of checking in steps 3 to 8 may not be as

expected, depending on the settings relating to the

viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired

items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the

OPERATION menu.

Iris: A (auto)

Zoom: SERVO/MANU.

VDR SAVE/STBY: SAVE

GAIN: Set as low as possible

WHITE BAL: A or B

OUTPUT/DCC: BARS

Note

163

Maintenance

Appendix

For details, see “Selecting the Display Items” on

page 136.

Testing the iris and zoom functions

Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that

the power zoom operates correctly.

Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the

zoom functions manually. Turn the manual zoom lever

from the telephoto position to the wide-angle position

to check that the picture changes depending on the

lever position.

Set the IRIS switch on the lens to A (auto) and point

the camera at objects of different brightness. Check

that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly.

Set the IRIS switch on the lens to M (manual) and

check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris

correctly.

Set the IRIS switch on the lens back to A (auto) and

check the following points when the GAIN switch is

moved from L to M to H.

• For objects of the same brightness, the iris is

adjusted to correspond to the change in setting.

• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes

to correspond to the change in setting.

When a lens with extender is mounted, set the lens

extender lever to the 2x position and check that auto

iris functions correctly.

Testing the VDR

Continuously carry out the procedures from “(1) Testing

the recording and playback functions” to “(6) Checking the

user bit and timecode functions” described below.

(1) Testing the recording and playback functions

Using the following buttons in the LCD monitor,

display the text information.

DISPLAY/EXPAND button: CHAR

COUNTER/CHAPTER button: COUNTER

BRIGHT button: adjustment of backlight brightness

Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET,

and set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.

Press the REC button and check the following points.

• The time counter indication in the LCD monitor

changes.

• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.

• The RF and SERVO indicators on the LCD monitor

are off.

Press the REC button again.

Check that recording stops and that the REC indicator

in the viewfinder goes off.

Repeat the checks of steps 3 and 4, this time using the

REC button on the lens.

Press the RESET button and check that the indication

in the time counter display section of the LCD

monitor.

Press the F REV button and check that fast reverse

playback is performed. Next, press the PLAY/PAUSE

button and check that normal playback is performed.

Press the STOP button and check that playback stops.

Next, press the F FWD button and check that fast

forward playback is performed.

Press the STOP button again, then press the PREV

button.

Check that the image of the beginning of the current or

previous clip is displayed.

Press the NEXT button, and check that the image of

the beginning of the next clip is displayed.

(2) Testing the automatic audio level adjusting

functions

Set both AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to

FRONT.

Set both AUDIO SELECT (CH-1 and CH-2) switches

to AUTO.

Set both AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches to F

(front).

Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN

connector at a suitable sound source.

Check that the level indications for channels 1 to 4

correspond to the sound level, respectively.

(3) Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions

Set both AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to

FRONT.

Turn the MIC LEVEL control.

Check that the channel-1 and -2 audio level meters on

the LCD monitor shows no segment when you fully

164 Maintenance

Appendix

turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the

camcorder front.

(4) Testing the earphone and speaker

Turn the MONITOR knob and check that the speaker

volume changes accordingly.

Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE

jack.

Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you

can hear the sound from the microphone in the

earphone.

Turn the MONITOR knob and check that the earphone

volume changes accordingly.

(5) Testing external microphones

Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-

1 and CH-2 connectors.

Set the +48V/OFF switches as follows.

• If the connected microphone is of the internal power

supply type, set the switch to OFF.

• If the connected microphone is of the external power

supply type, set the switch to +48V.

Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR.

Aim the microphones at a sound source.

Check that the audio level meters in the LCD monitor,

and the audio level indications in the viewfinder

change with the volume of the sound.

(6) Checking the user bit and timecode functions

Set the user bits as required.

For the operation, see “To set the user bits” on

page 67.

Set the timecode.

For the operation, see “To set the timecode” on

page 66.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.

Press the REC button, and check that recording starts

and that the timecode indication in the time counter

display section changes.

Press the REC button again, and check that recording

stops and that the timecode indication stops changing.

Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN, and

check that the timecode indication starts changing

again and continues to change even when you restart

recording and stop recording again.

Set the COUNTER/CHAPTER button to U-BIT, and

check that the user bits data that was set is displayed.

Maintenance

Cleaning the viewfinder

Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror

inside the viewfinder barrel.

Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially

available lens cleaner.

165

Operation Warnings

Appendix

Operation Warnings

When a problem occurs at power on or during operation, a

warning is given by one of the following.

• Warning indicators in the status display on the LCD

monitor

• WARNING indicators, and audible warnings from the

speaker and earphones

• Indicators on the viewfinder

The volume of the audible warnings can be adjusted with

the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the minimum

position to suppress the sound.

Status

display on

the LCD

monitor/

viewfinder

screen

WARNING

indicator

Warning

sound

Indicators in

the viewfinder

Problem VDR operation Action to take

Warning

indication

: Continuous

: 1 flash/s

: 4 flashes/s

Continuous

beep

1 beep/s

4 beeps/s

REC/

TALLY

BATT

: Continuous

: 1 flash/s

: 4 flashes/s

E**-** 1) – Recording

error Recording stops. Turn off the power

and consult your

Sony dealer.

MEM Full! 2) 2) 2) – Shockproof

memory

overflow

Recording

continuous but may

be substandard.

Protect the unit

from shocks and

vibration.

ILL.REC! 2) 2) 2) – Input sync

error Recording

continuous but may

be substandard.

Turn off the power

and contact your

Sony dealer. (This

indication may be

given momentarily

when a GENLOCK

signal is connected

or disconnected,

but this does not

indicate a problem.)

Disc Error! 2) 2) 2) – A disc defect

was detected. Recording

continues, avoiding

the defect, but may

be substandard.

If defects are

detected

repeatedly,

exchange the disc.

HUMID! 2) 2) 2) – Condensation

on the optical

pickup.

Recording/playback

continues but stops

when an error

occurs on the drive.

Stop recording/

playback, turn off

the power, then turn

it on again, and wait

until the HUMID

indicator

disappears.

Before Full 2) 2) 2) – Disc almost

full. Operation

continues. Be prepared to

change the disc.

DISC

FULL! 4) 4) 4) 4) – Disc full. Recording stops. Change the disc.

LOW BATT! 2) 5) 5) Battery almost

exhausted. Operation

continues. Change the battery.

BATT

EMPTY! Battery

exhausted. Operation stops. Change the battery.

166 Operation Warnings

Appendix

1) Asterisks (*) are replaced by digits in the display.

2) During recording

3) During playback, fast forward, fast reverse, or stop

4) During recording pause

5) During recording or pause

For details about the warning displays and alarm

messages on the viewfinder, see the next item.

Operation/alarm messages

An operation or alarm message is displayed in the

operation/alarm message display area (see page 32) of the

viewfinder screen.

A message for VDR operation is displayed in the setting

change and adjustment progress message display area of

the viewfinder screen (see page 32).

High TEMP! – Internal

temperature

high.

Operation

continues. Power the unit off

and move it to a

cool place.

ACC Sensor! – Internal drive

sensor error Operation

continues. Protect the unit

from shock and

vibrations, turn off

the power, and

contact your Sony

dealer.

Skew Sensor

Status

display on

the LCD

monitor/

viewfinder

screen

WARNING

indicator

Warning

sound

Indicators in

the viewfinder

Problem VDR operation Action to take

Warning

indication

: Continuous

: 1 flash/s

: 4 flashes/s

Continuous

beep

1 beep/s

4 beeps/s

REC/

TALLY

BATT

: Continuous

: 1 flash/s

: 4 flashes/s

Operation/alarm

message

Meaning

INTERVAL **M**S Indicates the camera is in the

Interval Rec mode. **M**S

indicates the shooting interval.

LOW LIGHT Appears, depending on the

setting, to indicate the subject

illumination is inadequate.

HIGH TEMPERATURE Indicates that temperatures have

risen inside the unit. Avoid

continued use in this state.

Message Meaning and action to take

ILL. Disc! The disc cannot be used by this

unit. Insert another Professional

Disc.

ILL. Index!

No FS!

Unknown FS!

Index file or file system error.

Exchange or format the disc.

No Support! A recorded clip cannot be handled

by this unit. Exchange or format

the disc.

FORMAT NG! The disc cannot be used by this

unit. Exchange the disc.

Disc Damage The disc cannot be recorded. To

record, exchange the disc.

Non AV Full

MAX # Files The disc is full. Exchange or

format the disc.

DI read err

Read err

DRV ADJ err

The disc was not recognized. Try

ejecting the disc and inserting it

again. Or exchange the disc.

Run Salvage Salvage processing needs to be

done on the disc. To record on the

disc, eject the disc, insert it again,

and execute salvage processing.

Salvage NG Salvage processing failed. +,-$

.#/&01"2$"##$5]&7.107'$,N$P0"8"$

L3#7$F#8,-.07'$P,#"$U,/$\7.$

U,-9&11W$!C&1J&'#$+K78/0,7*:$,7$

%&'# )>.

REC INHI.! The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is

in the recording disabled position,

or salvage processing needs to be

done on the loaded disc. Set the

tab to the recording enabled

position. Or eject the disc, insert it

again, and perform salvage

processing.

Message Meaning and action to take

167

Operation Warnings

Appendix

a) REC INHI.! appears if you attempt to start recording.

Alarm messages during thumbnail search,

scene selection, and clip list operations

Alarm messages may appear in the LCD monitor during

thumbnail search, scene selection, and clip list operations.

In this case, take the action indicated in the following table.

HD 50I/25P

HD 60I/30P

HD 23P Disc

525/60

625/50

2CH×16 Clip

4CH×16 Clip

The loaded disc has a different

recording format. Exchange the

disc, or change the recording

format.

Index File! There is an unsupported index file

on the disc to which you are trying

to record. Exchange or format the

disc.

File System There is an unsupported file

system on the disc to which you

are trying to record. Exchange or

format the disc.

KEY INHI.! a) Disc operations are not possible

when the DC IN connector is not

connected and the CA-755 is

being used.

ILL. PLAY! An A/V phase error occurred

during playback. Stop the disc.

Lid Closed! The lid of the disc compartment

does not open. Check the lid.

Lid Open! The lid of the disc compartment is

not closed. Close it securely.

No Clip! There are no clips recorded on the

disc. Exchange for a recorded

disc.

No Disc! There is no disc loaded. Insert a

disc and try the operation again.

STOP ONCE!

REC mode! The operation is not possible while

the disc is being played or

recorded. Stop the disc.

Disc Top!

Disc End! The operation is not possible

because the disc is at the top or

end.

Formatting! The disc is being automatically

formatted. Wait until the format

ends.

Recording The unit is writing to the file

system. Wait until writing finishes.

No EM Space

EM Full! Essence marks cannot be

inserted. +,-$.#/&01"2$"##$

5F#8,-.07'$C3,/$[&-=":$,7$

%&'# AE;

SB CLP mode Press the SEL/SET button (four-

way arrow key) up to clear the

SUB CLIP indicator before

carrying out the operation.

No SEL List No clip list is selected. Create a

new clip list, or load a clip list from

the disc.

No List! There is no clip list. Create a clip

list.

No SUB Clip There are no sub clips in the clip

list. Register a sub clip, or load

another clip list.

Message Meaning and action to take

SUB Clip NG The In and Out point positions are

invalid. Set correct In and Out

points.

MAX# SB CLP The total number of sub clips is

over the upper limit (300).

CL OVER DUR The total duration of sub clips in

the current clip list is over the

upper limit (24 hours).

FAN Stopped!

DR-FAN Stop The main unit or drive fan has

stopped. Avoid use under high

temperatures, turn off the power,

and contact your Sony dealer.

Message Meaning and action to take

CANNOT EXPAND

CLIP

ANY FURTHER.

The clip cannot be expanded into

more blocks.

This appears when the EXPAND

button is pressed when the

number of block is maximum, or

when the duration of an expanded

thumbnail is 1 frame.

SELECTED ESSENCE

MARK

DOES NOT EXIST.

The selected essence mark does

not exist.

This appears in the essence mark

selection screen when the

specified essence mark does not

exist on the disc.

SUB CLIP IS INVALID.

SET APPROPRIATE

IN/OUT POINTS.

The temporal relationship between

the specified In and Out points in a

TRIM operation !"##$%&'#$?A* is

not correct.

Reset so that the value of the Out

point timecode is larger than the

value of the In point timecode.

DURATION OF ONE

CLIP LIST MUST BE

LESS THAN 24

HOURS.,

The total duration of the current

clip list is greater than 24 hours.

This appears when the total

duration of the current clip list

exceeds the upper limit of 24

hours as the result of a sub clip

ADD$!"##$%&'#$?@* operation or a

TRIM operation !"##$%&'#$?A*.

NO MORE SUB CLIPS

CAN BE ADDED TO

THE CLIP LIST.

The upper limit of sub clips in the

current clip list has been

exceeded.

This appears when the total

duration of the current clip list

exceeds the upper limit of 24

hours as the result of a sub clip

ADD$!"##$%&'#$?@* operation or a

TRIM operation !"##$%&'#$?A*.

Message Meaning and action to take

168 Operation Warnings

Appendix

SUB CLIP DOES NOT

EXIST. There are no sub clips in the

current clip list.

This appears when an attempt is

made to execute a MOVE !"##$

%&'#$?A*, TRIM !"##$%&'#$?A*,

DELETE !"##$%&'#$?B*, or TC

PRESET operation !"##$%&'#$??*

with no sub clips in the current clip

list.

CLIP LIST DOES NOT

EXIST. There are no clip lists on the disc.

This appears when an attempt is

made to execute a DELETE CLIP

LIST operation !"##$%&'#$DED*

when there are no clip lists on the

disc.

MOVE IS INVALID. The sub clip cannot be moved.

This appear hen an attempt is

made to execute a MOVE

operation !"##$%&'#$?A* when

there are no sub clip in the current

clip list, or when there is only 1.

SHOT MARK DOES

NOT EXIST. The specified shot mark has not

been recorded.

This appears when an attempt is

made to execute a DELETE SHOT

MARK operation on a clip when

the specified shot mark has not

been recorded for that clip.

REC START CANNOT

BE DELETED. REC START cannot be deleted.

This appears when an attempt is

made to delete a REC START with

a DELETE SHOT MARK

operation. DELETE SHOT MARK

can delete only SHOT MARK1 and

SHOT MARK2 marks.

CLIP IS LOCKED. The clip is locked.

This appears when an attempt is

made to delete a clip, set the clip

thumbnail, or delete a shot mark

when the clip is locked.

ALL CLIPS ARE

LOCKED. All clips are locked.

This appears when an attempt is

made to execute a LOCK ALL

CLIPS operation when all clips are

already locked.

ALL CLIPS ARE

UNLOCKED. All clips are unlocked.

This appears when an attempt is

made to execute an UNLOCK ALL

CLIPS operation when all clips are

already unlocked.

Message Meaning and action to take

169

Troubleshooting

Appendix

Troubleshooting

You can use this chart to establish possible causes of an

apparent problem; always double-check before sending

the camcorder for repair. If a problem persists, contact

your Sony dealer.

Symptoms Cause Remedy

The camcorder does not power on

when you set the POWER switch to

ON.

There is no battery pack attached. Attach a battery pack !"##$%&'#$@>*.

The battery pack is exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged

one !"##$%&'#$@>*.

The AC adaptor is not connected. Connect the AC adaptor !"##$%&'#$@>*.

Recording does not start when you

press the REC button. The POWER switch is set to OFF. Set the POWER switch to ON.

The disc has the Write Inhibit tab in the

recording disabled position. Set the Write Inhibit tab to allow recording

!"##$%&'#$)R*, or change the disc.

The disc is full. Replace the disc with one with sufficient free

space, or format the disc !"##$%&'#$))*.

The inserted disc requires salvage

processing. Carry out salvage processing !"##$%&'#$)>*.

The recording format setting is different

from that of the already recorded clips. Change the disc, or change the recording

format !"##$%&'#$)B*.

Playback does not start when you

press the PLAY button. The unit is stopped at the position after

recording finished. Press the PREV button to move to the first

frame of a clip, or hold down the PLAY/

PAUSE button and press the PREV button to

move to any other position.

The power supply cuts while

operating. The battery pack is exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged

one !"##$%&'#$@>*.

The battery goes dead very quickly. The operating temperature is very low. Use a BP-GL95 !"##$%&'#$@>*.

The battery pack is inadequately charged. Recharge the battery pack !"##$%&'#$@>*.

It is not possible to eject the disc. The battery pack is exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged

one !"##$%&'#$@>*.

If the battery cannot be charged, or there is

no replacement battery, use the procedure in

the next item, “To eject the disc when there is

no power supply” to eject the disc.

The POWER switch is set to OFF. Set the POWER switch to ON.

The playback picture quality is poor.

The playback picture does not

appear.

The playback sound does not hear.

The disc surface is scratched, or there is

dirt or dust adhering to the disc. Replace the disc.

The recording surface of the disc has

deteriorated over time.

The laser diode has deteriorated. In the HOURS METER page of the

DIAGNOSIS menu, check the cumulative

light output parameters of the optical head

!"##$%&'#$D(?*.

All controls except the EJECT

button are disabled. There is condensation. Remove the disc and wait with the power on

until the condensation has evaporated.

Audio recording is not possible. The AUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) knobs

are set to the minimum level. Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL

knobs !"##$%&'#$DR*.

Audio recording is not possible (CH-

1 only). The AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front is set

to the minimum level. Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knob

on the front !"##$%&'#$(E*.

The recorded sound is distorted. The audio level is too high. Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL

knobs, and record again !"##$%&'#$(E*.

The recorded sound has a high

noise level. The audio level is too low. Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL

knobs, and record again !"##$%&'#$(E*.

170 Troubleshooting

Appendix

To eject the disc when there is no power supply

When the battery is exhausted, for example, pressing the

EJECT button does not operate the disc ejection

mechanism. In such cases, as an emergency measure you

can remove the disc manually using the following

procedure.

Turn off the power supply to the unit.

Carry out the following operations.

After removing the disc, it is not necessary to return the

screw to its original position. When the power supply is

restored, the mechanism will again function normally.

The equipment connected to the

camcorder via an i.LINK connection

does not react as expected, for

example, the video image does not

appear on its screen.

It sometimes takes time for the connected

equipment to recognize the operation. Wait for about 15 seconds. If the connected

equipment still does not react, do the

following.

• Check the i.LINK cable, for example, by

re-plugging the i.LINK cable.

• Turn the power off, and connect the cable

again.

• Change the i.LINK cable.

The camera is not recognized by

the computer connected via i.LINK

interface.

There is a problem with the software, for

example, it does not support the MPEG

HD/DVCAM format, etc.

Install software that supports the MPEG HD/

DVCAM format.

The camera cannot be controlled by

the computer connected via i.LINK

interface.

Symptoms Cause Remedy

1Open the rubber cap to

reveal an access hole.

2With a screwdriver or

similar instrument, slide

the black metal plate in the

access hole toward the

rear of the unit.

The lid of the disc

compartment opens. The

red-colored cross

recessed head screw can

be seen in the access

hole.

3Use a Phillip type

screwdriver to turn the red

screw counterclockwise

(in the direction shown on

the rubber cap). This

ejects the disc.

4Replace the rubber cap

171

Using UMID Data

Appendix

Using UMID Data

To perform operations from interviewing to editing

effectively and to detect audio-visual materials easily

when reusing them, metadata that provides additional

information is recorded along with audio-visual data on a

disc.

As one of application of metadata, the UMID (Unique

Material Identifier) is internationally standardized.

What is a UMID?

The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique

identifier for audio-visual material defined by the

SMPTE330M-2003 standard.

The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte Basic UMID

or as the Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32

bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.

For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.

Globally unique ID is automatically recorded every

shooting.

The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional

information such as location, time/date, company and so

on.

The UMID is applied as follows.

Using the Extended UMID

You have to enter a country code, organization code and

user code. Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166

table, and set the organization code and user code

independently.

For details, see “Additional information related to the

UMID” on page 172.

Functions of UMID data

The UMID data enables the following:

Spatial

Coordinates

Extended UMID (64 bytes)

Basic UMID (32 bytes) Source pack (32 bytes)

Universal label L Instance

No. Material Number Time/Date UserCountry Org

12 bytes 1 3 bytes 16 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes4 bytes

Instance No.

Material No.

ID generated when

shooting

Same as the above

Source Pack

Shooting

information (when,

where and who)

Same as the above

Distinguishing between

the original material and

copied material

Original material: 00 00 00

Copied material: Generation number (1 byte)

+ random number (2 bytes)

Material source ID/

detecting material Metadata pack that

identifies the source of

material unit by defining

the when, where and who

of the material unit with

which it is associated.

172 Using UMID Data

Appendix

• Add a globally unique ID to every shot of audio-visual

material. The unique ID is used to detect the material

source and to link it with the original source material.

• Distinguishing between original material and copied

material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original

material.

• The UTC is used when recording the UMID. This

enables uniform control of source material recorded all

over the world based on the universal timecode.

• Calculating the date difference among source materials.

The source material is recorded based on the MJD

(Modified Julian Date), which enables easy calculation

of date difference among source materials.

UMID menu setup

Set the following items required to use UMID data on the

UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu.

For details of the setting operation, see “Basic Menu

Operations” on page 131.

Additional information related to the UMID

COUNTRY CODE

When you select this item, the COUNTRY CODE window

appears.

Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte

alphanumeric strings) according to the values defined in

ISO 3166-1.

There are about 240 country codes.

Find your own country code on the following home page.

Refer to ISO 3166-1:

http://www.din.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/

codlstp1/en_listp1.html

When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part

of the code will occupy the first part of the 4-bytes and the

remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).

Example: In the case of Japan

For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes, if JPN, it

is 3 bytes.

Thus, enter the following:

JP_ _

JPN _

(where _ represents a space.)

ORGANIZATION (organization code)

When you select this item, the ORGANIZATION window

appears.

Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string for the

organization code.

There are no problems in recording or playing back audio-

video signals,if ORGANIZATION is not set.

Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the

SMPTE registration office. When no organization code

has been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary

string. As a rule, the code “00” must be entered. Freelance

operators who do not belong to an origination should enter

“˜”.

USER CODE

When you select this item, the USER CODE window

appears.

Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user

identification.

The user code is registered with each organization locally.

It is usually not centrally registered.

When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code

from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space

character (20h) in the remaining strings.

This user code is determined by the organization. The

methods used depend on the organization.

User bits cannot be entered when no organization code has

been entered.

TIME ZONE

When you select this item, the TIME ZONE window

appears.

The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using the

time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not

recorded correctly.

Set the time difference from UTC. When setting the

summer time or daylight saving time, change the code to

one which will advance the time by 1 hour.

When you change the time zone, adjust the built-in clock

to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and

then the power on again.

Item Description

COUNTRY CODE Sets the country code.

ORGANIZATION Sets the organization code.

USER CODE Sets the user code.

TIME ZONE Sets the time difference from

UTC.

Note

173

MPEG-4 License / About i.LINK

Appendix

MPEG-4 License

This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent

Portfolio License. For the personal and non-commercial

use of a consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance

with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”)

and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by

a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial

activity and/or was obtained from a video provider

licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG-4 Video.

No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.

Additional information including that relating to

promotoional, internal and commercial uses and licensing

may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.

See http://www.mpegla.com

About i.LINK

This section explains the specifications and features of

i.LINK.

What is i.LINK?

i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate

devices equipped with i.LINK connectors. i.LINK allows

your device to:

• Perform two-way transmission and reception of data

such as digital audio and digital video signals.

• Control other i.LINK devices.

• Easily connect multiple devices with a single i.LINK

cable.

Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a wide

range of digital AV devices for data transfer and other

operations.

Other advantages include the following feature. When

connected to multiple i.LINK devices, your i.LINK device

can perform data transfer and other operations not only

with the directly connected devices but also with any of the

devices that are connected to those devices. Therefore, you

do not need to be concerned with device connection order.

However, depending on the features and specifications of

the connected devices, you may need to use certain

functions differently, and you may not be able to transfer

data or perform certain operations.

i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by Sony, is a

trademark supported by many companies worldwide.

IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE,

the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

The camcorder can be connected to one device with the

i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you connect with a device

that has two or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the

operating instructions supplied with the connected device.

About data transfer speed of i.LINK

i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of

approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps1) that are described

as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.

For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer speed that

the device supports is identified on “Specifications” page

of the operating instructions supplied with the device or

near its i.LINK connector.

When connecting with the device that support different

data transfer speed, the actual data transfer speed may be

different from those described on the i.LINK connectors.

Note

174 About a “Memory Stick”

Appendix

1) What is Mbps?

Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at which data

is transmitted per second. In case of 100 Mbps, 100 Mega

bits of data can be transmitted per second.

i.LINK operation with your camcorder

For details on operation when other equipment with

i.LINK (DV) connector is connected, see page 51.

For details on connection with i.LINK cable and necessary

software, refer to the operating instructions supplied with

the connected device.

Use Sony i.LINK cables

Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK devices.

6 pins y 4 pins (For DV dubbing)

6 pins y 6 pins (For DV dubbing)

i.LINK and are trademarks.

About a “Memory Stick”

What is “Memory Stick”?

“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile

IC (Integrated Circuit) recording medium with a data

capacity that exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is

specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data

among “Memory Stick” compatible products. Because it is

removable, “Memory Stick” can also be used for external

data storage.

“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes: standard size

and compact “Memory Stick Duo” size. Once attached to

a “Memory Stick Duo” adaptor, “Memory Stick Duo”

turns to the same size as standard “Memory Stick” and thus

can be used with products compliant with standard

“Memory Stick”.

Types of “Memory Stick”

“Memory Stick” is available in the following four types to

meet various requirements in functions.

“Memory Stick-R”

Stored data are not overwritten. You can write data to

“Memory Stick-R” with “Memory Stick-R” compatible

products only. Copyright protected data that requires

MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be

written to “Memory Stick-R”.

“Memory Stick”

Stores any type of data except copyright-protected data

that requires the MagicGate copyright protection

technology.

“MagicGate Memory Stick”

Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection

technology.

“Memory Stick-ROM”

Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot record on

“Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the pre-recorded data.

Available types of “Memory Stick”

You can use a “Memory Stick” and “MagicGate Memory

Stick” with your product.

You can not use a “Memory Stick Duo” with your product.

Note

175

About a “Memory Stick”

Appendix

Note on data read/write speed

Data read/write speed may vary depending on the

combination of the “Memory Stick” and “Memory Stick”

compliant product you use.

What is MagicGate?

MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses

encryption technology.

Before using a “Memory Stick”

• When you set the “Memory Stick” write-protect tab to

“LOCK”, data cannot be recorded, edited, or erased.

• Data may be damaged if:

- You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the unit

while it is reading or writing data.

- You use the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to

the effects of static electricity or electric noise.

• We recommend that you make a backup copy of

important data that you record on the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to

the “Memory Stick” labelling position.

• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the

labelling position.

• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.

• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with

anything, including your finger or metallic objects.

• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.

• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.

• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that

is:

- Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun

- Under direct sunlight

- Very humid or subject to corrosive substances

“Memory Stick” access indicator

If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing, data is

being read from or written to the “Memory Stick”. At this

time, do not shake the computer or product or subject them

to shock. Do not turn off the power of the computer and

product or remove the “Memory Stick”. This may damage

the data.

Precautions

• To prevent data loss, make backups of data frequently. In

no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data.

• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the

provisions of copyright law. When you use a “Memory

Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be sure that the

material has been recorded in accordance with copyright

and other applicable laws.

• The “Memory Stick” application software of the

camcorder may be modified or changed by Sony without

prior notice.

• Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage

performances and other entertainment events, even if

they are recorded for personal use only.

Notes

Terminal

Write-protect tab

Labelling position

• “Memory Stick” and are trademarks of Sony

Corporation.

• “Memory Stick Duo” and “ ” are

trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “MagicGate” and “ ” are trademarks

of Sony Corporation.

176 Specifications

Appendix

Specifications

General

Power voltage 12 V DC +5.0/–1.0 V

Power consumption

PDW-F330: 31 W

PDW-F350: 32 W

(with 12 V DC supply, when recording

with the LCD monitor on)

Operating temperature

–5°C to +40°C (23°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Recording/Playback format

VIDEO MPEG HD: HQ35/SP25/

LP18 Mbps

DVCAM: 25 Mbps

Proxy video MPEG-4 1)

Audio MPEG HD: 16/24 bits, 48 kHz,

4/2 channels

DVCAM: 16 bits, 48 kHz,

4 channels

Proxy audio A-law (8 bits, 8 kHz,

4 channels)

1) The MPEG-4 CODEC is a product of Ingenient Technologies,Inc.

Recording/playback time (for PFD23)

MPEG HD

DVCAM

85 minutes

Continuous operating time

Approx. 160 min. (with BP-GL95)

Mass PDW-F330:

Approx. 3.8 kg (8 lb 6 oz) (main body

only)

Approx. 5.4 kg (11 lb 4 oz) (with DXF-

801/801CE Viewfinder, microphone,

disc and BP-GL95 Battery Pack)

Approx. 6.8 kg (14 lb 15 oz) (with DXF-

801/801CE Viewfinder, microphone,

disc, BP-GL95 Battery Pack and VCL-

719BXS Auto Focus Lens)

PDW-F350:

Approx. 3.85 kg (8 lb 7 oz) (main body

only)

Approx. 5.5 kg (12 lb 2 oz) (with DXF-

20W Viewfinder, microphone, disc

and BP-GL95 Battery Pack)

Dimensions

Supplied accessories

VCL-719BXS Auto Focus Lens (1)

(supplied with PDW-F330K only)

DXF-801/801CE Viewfinder (1) (PDW-

F330L/F330K)

DXF-20W Viewfinder (1) (PDW-F350L)

Stereo microphone (1)

Wind screen (1)

Shoulder strap (1)

VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor (1)

Lens mount cap (1)

Flange focal length adjustment test chart

(1)

RM-F300 Infrared Remote Commander

(1)

PFD23 Professional Disc (1)

PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software (1)

Operating Instructions

English version (1)

Japanese version (1)

CD-ROM manual (1)

Warranty Booklet (1)

Video camera section

General

Imager 1/2-inch type, interline transfer CCD

Effective picture elements

1440 (H) & 1080 (V)

Imager Configuration

RGB 3 CCDs

Spectral system

F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)

Built-in filter ND filter

1: CLEAR

2: 1/4 ND

3: 1/16 ND

4: 1/64 ND

Lens mount Sony 1/2-inch type bayonet-mount

Sensitivity F9 standard (89.9% reflection chart, 2000

lx)

Minimum illumination

0.13 lx (at F1.4, +48 dB gain)

Video S/N ratio 54 dB (Y-typical)

Mode 4-channel audio 2-channel audio

HQ 65 minutes or more 68 minutes or more

SP Approx. 85 minutes Approx. 90 minutes

LP 112 minutes or more 122 minutes or more

Unit: mm (inches)

124

(5)

222

(83/4)

328

(13)

268

(105/8)

177

Specifications

Appendix

Modulation 800 TV lines

Geometric distortion

None identified (excluding distortion due

to lens)

Smear –120 dB (Y-typical)

LCD Picture: 8.9 cm (2 1/2 inches) in opposite

angle (3.5 type)

Pixel resolution: 25,000 pixels (1120

wide & 224 high)

Effective picture elements: more than

99.99%

VCL-719BXS Auto Focus Lens (supplied with the

PDW-F330K)

Focal length 6.7 mm to 127 mm

Zoom Manual or motorized, selectable

Zoom ratio &19

Maximum aperture

1:1.6, 1:2.1 (Telephoto)

Iris control Manual or automatic, selectable

F1.6 to F16 or C (closed)

Focusing Manual or automatic, selectable

Focusing range 5 cm to !

Filter attaching thread

M82 mm, 0.75-mm pitch

Mount Sony 1/2-inch bayonet mount

Mass Approx. 1.34 kg (2 lb 15 oz) (including

lens hood)

External dimensions (w/h/d)

DXF-801/801CE Viewfinder (supplied with the

PDW-F330L/F330K)

Picture tube 1.5-inch, aspect ratio 4:3, monochrome

Indicators REC (& 2), TALLY, BATT, SHUTTER,

GAIN UP

Horizontal resolution

600 TV lines

Power voltage 12 V DC

Power consumption

2.4 W

Mass Approx. 620 g (1 lb 5 oz)

Maximum dimensions

240 & 91 & 196 mm

(9 1/2 & 3 5/8 & 7 3/4 inch) (w/h/d)

DXF-20W Viewfinder (supplied with the PDW-

F350L)

Picture tube 2-inch, aspect ratio 16:9, monochrome

Indicators REC (&2), TALLY, BATT,

SHUTTER, GAIN UP

Resolution 600 lines

Power voltage 12V DC

Power consumption

3 W

Mass Approx. 620 g (1 lb 5 oz)

Maximum dimensions

239 & 76 & 215 mm (9 1/2 & 3 & 8 1/2

inches) (w/h/d)

Stereo microphone

Type Back electret condenser microphone

Directivity Super cardioid

Frequency response

100 Hz to 20 kHz

Output impedance

100 "

Power voltage 48 V DC

Mass Approx. 120 g (4 oz)

Dimensions 162 × 21 mm (6 1/2 × 27/32 inches) (length

& diameter) (excluding cable)

Optical Disc Drive Section

Video characteristics

Sampling frequency

Y: 74.25 MHz

PB/PR: 37.125 MHz

Quantization 8 bits/sample

Compression MPEG-2 MP@HL

DVCAM

Audio characteristics

Sampling frequency

48 kHz

Quantization 16-bit/2-channel, 16-bit/4-channel

Headroom 20/18/16/12 dB (selectable)

Frequency response

20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB (0 dB,

1 kHz)

Dynamic range More than 85 dB

Distortion Max. 0.08 % (1 kHz)

Input/output connectors

Signal inputs

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2

XLR type, 3-pin, female

–60 dBu, –50 dB, –40 dBu/+4 dBu

(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)

MIC IN XLR type, 5-pin, female, –50 dBu

GENLOCK IN BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ", unbalanced

TC IN BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 k"%(On

PDW-F330, this can be switched to

serve as TC OUT)

MACRO

PUSH

FOCUS ON OFF

SERVO MANU.

ZOOM

Unit: mm (inches)

106

(41/4)

174 (67/8)

122

(47/8)211 (83/8)

215 (81/2)

178 Specifications

Appendix

Signal outputs

AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2

RCA phono jack, –10 dBu, 47 k"%(PDW-

F330 only)

XLR type, 5-pin, male, +4 dBu, 600 "

(PDW-F350)

VIDEO OUT (composite)

BNC type 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ", unbalanced

VIDEO OUT (component, PDW-F330 only)

BNC type (1 set), Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ",

R–Y/B–Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 "

HDSDI OUT (PDW-F350 only)

BNC type, SMPTE 292M

TC OUT BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 "

(On PDW-F330, this can be switched

to serve as TC IN)

EARPHONE (mini jack)

8 ", – ! to –15 dBs variable

Others

DC IN XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 to 17 V DC

DC OUT 4-pin, 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated

current 0.2 A

LENS 12-pin

REMOTE 8-pin

LIGHT 1) 2-pin

i.LINK 6-pin, IEEE 1394

1) The accessory fitting shoe which you can use to attach a video light to this

unit is of the 1/4-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a

slide-type shoe, contact your Sony dealer.

Pin assignment of the connectors

DC IN connector (4-pin, male)

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connector (3-pin, female)

Sony Cinealta Pdw F330K Users Manual F330L/F330K/F350L

PDW-F330K to the manual 15a6a6fc-02ca-40ce-bcf4-f1e24b357d8e

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation